Anda di halaman 1dari 262

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634

Transformer Differential Protection Devices

Volume 2 of 2

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Contents
1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 3 3.1 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 5 5.1 6 6.1 6.2 Overview Operation Configuration of the Measured Value Panels Serial Interfaces Configurable Function Keys Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs Measured Data Input Main Functions of the P63x Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (P632, P633 only) Interlocking Logic (P632, P633 only) Single-Pole Commands (P632, P633 only) Single-Pole Signals (P632, P633 only) Design Detachable HMI User Interface (HMI) Display and Keypad Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general) Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control keys) (P632, P633 only) Settings Parameters Information and Control Functions Operation Fault and Event Records (LOC) (F_KEY) (INP) (MEASI) (MAIN) (CBF_1 to CBF_4) (DEV01 to DEV03) (ILOCK) (CMD_1) (SIG_1) 5 13 13 15 16 19 20 21 37 50 65 67 68 70 70 73 73 75 77 78 78 98 98 106

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-3

U-4

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version P631-306-405/406-611-716 P632-306-405/406-611-716 P633-306-407/408/409 -611-716 P634-306-405/406-611-716 Release: 31.08.2007 Hardware Diagram Software IEC

Changes No modifications No modifications The data model of the measured operating values for differential current and restraining current in the functions DIFF and REF_n is now implemented according to the data attributes for the standard WYE, ACT and ACD classes. Note: With this implementation, the "phase" measured values from the DIFF protection functions correspond to the measured values of the three measuring systems: "phSA" = Measuring system 1 "phSB" = Measuring system 2 "phSC" = Measuring system 3 Accordingly the measured values from the REF_n protection functions are modeled as "neut". ICD and PICS-MICS-ADL files have been upgraded accordingly.

P631-308-407/408-620 P632-308-407/408-620 P633-308-410/411/412-620 P634-308-407/408-620 Release: 06.06.2008

Hardware

The binary I/O module X (4H) with four high-break contacts is now available. With the P632/P633, the binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO) for the control of up to three switchgear units is available as an additional option.

Diagram

The updated connection diagrams now include the new binary I/O module X (4H) and the binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO).

P631 -407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P631 -408 (for 40TE case, ring-terminal connection) P632 -407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P632 -408 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection) P633 -410 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633 -411 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633 -412 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection) P634 -407 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P634 -408 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

Software DVICE The previous parameter DVICE: Order No. has been renamed to DVICE: AFS Order No. (000 001) (001 000).

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-9

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version LOC

Changes The previous parameters LOC: Assignment reset key LOC: Assignment read key have been renamed to LOC: Fct. reset key LOC: Fct. read key without any changes in their functionality. (005 251) and (080 110) (005 251) and (080 110)

Now the selection offered for the parameter L O C : L a n g u a g e (003 020) no longer is between, e.g. German, and English but between Regional language and Reference language. (This will not cause any changes in functionality as the Reference language is US English and the Regional language will depend on the language order option.) IEC GOOSE The menu point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) is now available when the communications protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is set. P632, P633 only: Several GOOSE signals have been added as part of the new control functionality. For a detailed listing see sections "Settings / Configuration Parameters" and "Information and Control Functions / Logic State Signals".

U-10

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version MAIN

Changes The following menu points are now available for each parameter subset: MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PSx MAIN: Vnom prim. end b PSx MAIN: Vnom prim. end c PSx MAIN: Vnom prim. end d PSx The following menu point has been renamed: MAIN: Device on-line (previously: M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d ) The following parameters are now available for status signals from external devices (CBx = CB1 to CB4): MAIN: Sig. asg. CBx open MAIN: Sig. asg. CBx closed Note: These signal assignment parameters are visible for 4 circuit breakers with P631, P632, P633 and P634. However, they can only be used with the P632 and P633 and only in accordance with the number of CBs supported. In order to configure function keys with control functions the P632 and P633 have the following parameters available which may be assigned to four of the six function keys: MAIN: Device selection key (006 001) MAIN: Device OPEN key (006 002) MAIN: Device CLOSE key (006 003) MAIN: Local/Remote key (006 004) The P632 and P633 now feature the acquisition of debounced binary signals for control functions, and the parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g . As part of the control functionality the P632 and P633 now feature additional parameters. MAIN: Type of bay (220 001) MAIN: Customized bay type (221 062) MEASI INP FT_DA The result of the temperature measurement may now be also read out as the maximum value since the last reset operation (temperature Tmax). The setting I N P : F i l t e r (010 220) is now available for conformity with standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A. Correction: The wrong internal timing where the parameter FT_DA: Run time to meas. (004 199) could take on the value 'Overflow' has been corrected. Correction: With the following menu points the step size for temperature values has be reduced from 0.01 to 0.001. THRM1: THRM2: THRM1: THRM2: Object temp. p.u. 1 Object temp. p.u. 2 Coolant temp. p.u. 1 Coolant temp. p.u. 2 (004 205) (004 208) (004 206) (004 209)

THRM1, THRM2

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-11

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version CBF_x

Changes The previous parameter CBF_1: Function group CBF has been renamed to CBF_1: Function group CBF_1 without any changes in the functionality. (056 007) (056 007)

The following parameters may now not only be set to an explicit time value but also to 'Blocked'. CBF_2: Delay/fault beh. CB (022 227) CBF_3: Delay/fault beh. CB (022 240) CBF_4: Delay/fault beh. CB (022 254) The startup criterion has been modified. After a CBF startup the state of the general trip signal or the external trigger signal are now no longer considered. The CBF will then only reset if the current criterion is met (current values to fall below I< with all three phases) or the CB state is open. DEV01 to DEV03 (P632, P633 only) ILOCK (P632, P633 only) CMD_1 (P632, P633 only) SIG_1 (P632, P633 only) New function groups "External Devices xx" (xx = 01, 02, 03) as part of the implementation of control functions.

New function group "Interlocking Logic" as part of the implementation of control functions. New function group "Single Pole Commands" as part of the implementation of control functions. New function group "Single Pole Signals" as part of the implementation of control functions.

U-12

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2 2.1 Function keys on the front panel user interface (HMI)

Operation Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)

The new detachable HMI (as of version -611) provides 6 freely configurable function keys. Either a single function, one of the two group resetting functions or one of the two menu jump lists may be assigned to each of these function keys with the setting parameter F _ K e y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6). As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure U-2 Function key F1 is only enabled after the associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 , has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6. Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Mechanisms' as well as in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'. Note: Each of the 6 keys has an LED indicator situated next to it which is freely configurable, such as the other 12 LED indicators, but independent of the configuration of the function keys (i.e. the function assignment is for red and green light emission). Selection of the control point (P632, P633) As of version -620 the function keys available on the units P632 and P633 can also be configured as control keys (e.g. Local/Remote, Device Selection, Device OPEN, Device CLOSE). See figure U-1 and section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys (P632, P633 only)'. Therefore new settings have been added to function group HMI. Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching between local and remote control is achieved using either an appropriately configured function key or an external key switch. The position of this switch is checked via an appropriately configured input (configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . L / R k e y s w . ) For further information on the application of a function key to switch the control point from 'Local' to 'Remote' refer to sections 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'. The setting at L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y determines whether the control point is switched (using either the L/R key or the key switch) from 'Local' to 'Remote' control (LR) or from 'Local+Remote' to 'Local' control (R&LL) and back again. If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only local control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-13

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

F_KEY: Fct. assignm . F1 [ 080 112 ]

LOC: Fct. assign . L/R key [ 225 208 ]

1 2
Local/Remote key [006 004 ]

1: R <-> L 2: R & L <-> L

1)

F1

& &

S1 1 R1 0

&
&

1
1

1 2,3 Local Remote Local & Remote 1 2 3

&

LOC: Rem.acc.block. active [ 221 004 ]


LOC: Loc.acc.block. active [ 221 005 ] LOC: Local & Remote Control
305 560

& &

MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw . [ 221 008 ]

Signal 1 Signal 2 m out of n Signal 3 Signal n

Without function Selected signal

1) Key of the local control panel

12Z6261 A_EN

U-1

Selection of the control point (The same applies to the other function keys F2 to F6.)

Configuration of the READ key As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y . They are triggered in sequence by key. repeated pressing of the "READ" Configuration of the CLEAR key ('C') Similar to the setting at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x up to 10 reset functions may be selected from a list at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y . These are carried out by pressing the "CLEAR" C key.

U-14

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.2 2.2.1

Serial interfaces Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE) Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

2.2.1.1 Control of switchgear units (P632, P633)

Control of switchgear units (external devices) by the P63x can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the device. Only one control command is executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of such a command are rejected. To have clients control switchgear units (external devices) the following operating modes can be set at I E C : D E V c o n t r o l model:

Control service mode Direct control with enhanced security SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security

When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are rejected. If, after a selection no control command is issued by the client, the P63x resets this selection after 2 minutes have elapsed. The switchgear units contact positions signalled to the clients are made with the Report Control Blocks of the switchgear units.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-15

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.3

Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)

The P63x includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable. Function keys F1 to Fx will only be enabled after the password has been entered at F_Key: Password funct. keyx. As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure U-2. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a password request is only issued when the command "Local/Remote switching" has been assigned to this function key. Configuration of function keys with a single function Each function key may be configured with a single function by selecting a logic state signal at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6), but with the exception: L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing the respective function key on the P63x. Configuration of the function keys with a group resetting function Respective binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned to all default reset functions. Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two group resetting functions assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x E X T (x: 1 or 2). By pressing the assigned function key all (up to 10) reset actions selected at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x (x: 1 or 2) are triggered. Configuration of function keys with menu jump lists Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu jump lists assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the assigned function key. Both menu jump lists are assembled at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2). Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be selected. Note: LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective function key configuration.

U-16

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Configuration of function keys as control keys (P632, P633 only) Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the listings at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6). MAIN: Local/Remote key MAIN: Device selection key MAIN: Device OPEN key MAIN: Device CLOSE key

These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above commands have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function keys. Operating mode of the function keys For each function key the operating mode may be selected at F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g m o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the operating mode 'Key' the selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the operating mode 'Switch' the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed. The state of the function keys can be displayed. Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is irrelevant and it is therefore ignored. Handling keys If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-17

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-2

Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a menu jump list.

U-18

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.4 Filter function

Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)

An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes 'Active "High", Filt.' or 'Active "Low", Filt.'). With this function enabled a status change at the binary logic input is only signalled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The number of sampling steps is set at parameter I N P : F i l t e r .

INP: Fct.assignm . Uxx [ XXX XXX ] Function 1 EXT Function 2 EXT Function 3 EXT Function n EXT Meas. Function & Function enabled

INP: Mode U xxx [ YYY XXX ]

0 1 2 3 0: 1: 2: 3: -Uxxx Input signal INP: Filter [ 010 220 ] & & & & & & INP: Control U xxx [ ZZZ ZZZ ] active active active active "Low" "High" "Low", filt. "High",filt.

12Z6213 A_EN

U-3

Configuration and operating mode of binary signal inputs (This diagram replaces figure 3-18 in the technical manual for version -610)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-19

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.5 2.5.1

Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer

The result of a temperature measurement cannot only be read out as a direct measured value (temperature T) or as a normalized value (temperature norm. T), but also as the maximum value since the last reset (temperature Tmax). For this the following menu points are available: MEASI: Temperature Tmax MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT MEASI: Reset Tmax USER (maximum temperature value) (reset via a binary signal) (manual reset)

MEASI: Enabled [ 035 008 ]

+ PT 100 Analog input -

MEASI: PT100 faulty [ 040 190 ] CHECK: PT100 open circuit [ 098 024 ]

MEASI: Temperature [ 004 133 ]

MEASI: Temperature p.u [ 004 221 ]

MEASI: Temperature Tmax [ 004 233 ]

64Z70H3A_EN

U-4

Temperature measurement with a resistance thermometer (This diagram replaces figure 3-24 in the technical manual for version -610)

U-20

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6 2.6.1

Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN) Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control - (P632, P633 only)

In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time acquisition (time tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as standard. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of three groups and for each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious pickups.

SIG_1: Gr.Asg. Debounc.S001 [ 226 003 ] 1 2 3 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT [ 226 004 ] MAIN: Debounce Time Gr . 1 [ 221 200 ] MAIN: Chatt.Mon. Time Gr .1 [ 221 201 ] MAIN: Change of State Gr .1 [ 221 202 ]

DEV01: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 031 ] DEV01: Open Signal EXT [ 210 030 ]

Debouncing & Chatter suppression Group 1

SIG_1: Debounced sig. S001


310 044

DEV01: Debounced cl.signal


310 045

DEV01: Debounced tr.signal


310 046

DEV01: Gr. Assign . Debounc. [ 210 011 ] 1 2 3 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 64Z7034A_UK

U-5

Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-21

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Debouncing The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value 'After debounce time'. After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is generated. Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce time has elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort') they are not necessarily saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If above parameter has been set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem sorted' then all entries are always saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.

U-6

Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge (e.g. parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem Unsort' or '1stEdge,OpMem Sorted'.) Example: Set debouncing time: 50 ms s: start e: end

U-22

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.2

Selection of the Bay Type - (P632, P633 only)

The P63x is designed to control up to three switchgear units. The Bay type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units. The P63x offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the P63x to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P63x. By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can also define new bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at MAIN: Customized bay type. Once the user has selected a bay type, the P63x can automatically configure the binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units. The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.

MAIN: Type of Bay [ 220 001 ] MAIN: AutoAssignment I /O [ 221 065 ] BB1 Q0

MAIN: DEVxx is a C.B.


306 044

MAIN: Customized Bay Type [ 221 062 ] 12Z51AQB_UK

U-7

Selection of the bay type

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-23

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.3

Function Blocks - (P632, P633 only)

By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations can be prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for example, by an external signal "CB drive not ready" or by the trip command from an external protection device. Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the function blocks 1 and 2 by setting a '1 out of n' parameter. The input signal from the function blocks starts a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the signal M A I N : F c t . b l o c k . x a c t i v e is issued.

U-8

Function blocks

U-24

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.4

Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Signals (P632, P633 only)

Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that represents the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the "Closed" position signal is made by the setting at M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d (x = 1 to 4). In the same way coupling between control and protection for the "Open" position signal is made by the setting at M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n (x = 1 to 4). As a result, the CB status signal needs to be assigned to a binary signal input only if this coupling is implemented. Note: With all unit versions, P631 to P634, these signal assignments are visible for four circuit breakers, but can only be used with P632 and P633 according to the number of supported CBs.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-25

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Sig. Asg. CB1 Closed [ * ] DEV01: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 031 ] DEV02: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 081 ] DEV03: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 131 ] MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT [ * ]

Selected signal MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT [ * ]

x: 1 MAIN: Sig. Asg. CB1 Closed 021 020

x: 2 021 060 036 230

x: 3 021 062 036 231

x: 4 021 064 036 232 64Z7032 A_UK

MAIN: CBx Closed 036 051 3p EXT

U-9

Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal

MAIN: Sig. Asg. CBx Open [ * ] DEV01: Open Signal EXT [ 210 030 ] DEV02: Open Signal EXT [ 210 080 ] DEV03: Open Signal EXT [ 210 130 ] MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT [ * ]

Selected signal MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT [ * ]

x: 1 MAIN: Sig. Asg. CBx Open MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT 021 017 031 028

x: 2 021 061 031 046

x: 3 021 063 031 047

x: 4 021 065 031 048 64Z7035 A_UK

U-10

Coupling between control and protection for the CB open signal

U-26

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.5

Multiple Signals - (P632, P633 only)

The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated. The stored signal is reset by the following actions:

General reset Latching reset The LED indicators have been reset. A command received through the communication interface.

If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal will follow the updated signal.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-27

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 [ 221 051 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3

Signal n Selected signal MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active [ 221 017 ] MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored [ 221 054 ]

MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 [ 221 052 ]

S1 1 R1

Selected signal

MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active [ 221 053 ] MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored [ 221 055 ]

COMM1: Reset mult. sig. 1 [ --- --- ] S1 1 COMM1: Reset mult. sig. 2 [ --- --- ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OUTP: Reset latching
402 102

R1

MAIN: Reset LED


306 020

12Z62FMA_EN

U-11

Multiple signals

U-28

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.6

CB Trip Signal - (P632, P633 only)

The signal M A I N : C B t r i p i n t e r n a l is issued if the following conditions are met simultaneously:

The binary signal input configured for tripping is set to a logic value of ' 1 ' or the selected trip command from the P63x is present. At the binary signal input configured as CB trip a logic value of ' 1 ' is present.

The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, two binary signal inputs need to be configured as 'CB trip enable ext.' and as 'CB trip ext.'.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-29

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Inp.Assign . Tripping [ 221 010 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Selected signal

MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 1 [ 036 071 ]

MAIN: Prot.Trip>CB Tripped [ 221 012 ] 0 1

MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 2 [ 036 022 ]

2 3 0 3

0: Disabled 1: Gen. Trip Command 1 2: Gen. Trip Command 2 3: Gen. Trip Command 1/2

MAIN: Inp. Asg. CB Trip [ 221 013 ] DEV01: Switch. Device Open [ 210 036 ] DEV02: Switch. Device Open [ 210 086 ] DEV03: Switch. Device Open [ 210 136 ] Selected signal

MAIN: Inp.Asg.CB Tr.En.Ext [ 221 050 ]

Selected signal

MAIN: CB Tripped [ 221 016 ]

MAIN: Inp.Asg. CB Trip Ext [ 021 024 ]

Selected signal 64Z7033 A_UK

U-12

CB trip signal

U-30

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.7

Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions (P632, P633 only)

Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the P63x, the P63x first checks whether the switch command may be executed. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close). Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station interlock. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. If the station interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and each control direction (see section Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units'). If Local has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks may be cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-31

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-13

General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or cancelling the interlocks

U-32

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-14

Rejection of switching commands

2.6.8

Communication Error - (P632, P633 only)

If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted, the signal 'Communication error' will be issued. This signal will also be issued if communication module A is not fitted.

U-15

Communication error

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-33

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.9

Resetting Actions

Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways. The following resetting actions (as of version -611) are available:

Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event data on the front panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only the displays on the front panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory. Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the front panel user interface (HMI). By selecting the required function at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is pressed. Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-for-step description in section 'Reset'.) Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 2 0 1 .) Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x . Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 2 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .) General resetting by setting parameters (menu point M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration options. General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration options.

Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then they all have equal priority. In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.

U-34

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them to a function key.

Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.) Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g. O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition (L O C : F c t . F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list. The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a resetting action through L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y .

MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute 1: execute

MAIN: Reset indicat. USER [ 021 010 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT [ 065 001 ]

MAIN: Reset LED


306 020

12Z6115 A_EN

U-16

General reset, resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel LCD (This diagram replaces figure 3-60 in the operating manual for version -610)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-35

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

LOC: Reset key active


310 024

&

OP_RC: Reset record . EXT [ 005 213 ]

LOC: Fct. reset key [ 005 251 ]

m out of n

OP_RC: Reset record . EXT [005 213]

MAIN: Group reset 1 USER [ * ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT [ * ] MAIN: Fct.assign . reset 1 [ * ] 1 &

m out of n x OP_RC: Reset record . EXT [005 213 ] 1 2 MAIN: Group reset 1 USER 005 253 005 254 MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT 005 209 005 252 MAIN: Fct. assign. reset 1 005 248 005 249

12Z61RMB_EN

U-17

"CLEAR" key on the front panel HMI and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T ); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are: [005 210] MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT [005 211] MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT [005 240] MT_RC: Reset record. EXT [005 241] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT [005 243] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT [005 255] MAIN: General reset EXT [006 075] f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT [006 076] MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT [035 182] V/f: Reset replica EXT [036 087] MEASI: Reset output EXT [039 122] THRM1: Reset replica EXT [036 158] CTS: Reset latching EXT [039 182] THRM2: Reset replica EXT [040 015] OUTP: Reset latch. EXT [040 138] MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT [065 001] MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT

U-36

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.7

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 to CBF_4)

As of version P63x -611 the new version of the circuit breaker failure protection function, identical with all Px3x protection devices, has been implemented. Depending on the design version this function group is repeatedly available so that a dedicated function may be applied to each end on the protected object. P631: P632: P633: P634: CBF_1 and CBF_2 CBF_1 and CBF_2 CBF_1 to CBF_3 CBF_1 to CBF_4

The following specifications apply to assigning these 4 functions to the physical measured current values and the internal logical signals. Assigning ends The currents to be monitored by the respective CBF function may be selected using setting parameters:
Address Description 022.156 CBF_1 022.157 CBF_2 022.158 CBF_3 022.162 CBF_4 Select. meas. input Select. meas. input Select. meas. input Select. meas. input Range of Values End a End b End c End d Current summation Units

Assigning CBs

Each CBF_x function is permanently assigned to the respective circuit breakers CBx. This concerns monitoring of the CB contact positions in conjunction with the MAIN function of the protection unit. There are no specifications concerning the assignment of circuit breakers to ends on the protected object.

Assigning the trip command

Which of the trip commands is to be used as a start criterion for the respective CBF function may be selected by setting parameter:
Address Description 022.202 CBF_1 022.216 CBF_2 022.230 CBF_3 022.244 CBF_4 Fct.assign. starting Fct.assign. starting Fct.assign. starting Fct.assign. starting Range of Values MAIN MAIN MAIN MAIN Gen. Gen. Gen. Gen. trip trip trip trip signal signal signal signal 1 2 3 4 Units

The functional range made available by the circuit breaker failure protection function CBF_1 is documented in the following description. Function groups CBF_2 to CBF_4 provide the same functional range.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-37

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

However, after release of the device software version -611 the following dependencies between functions have been identified: The following limitation in setting timer stages (bug fixed as of version -620) is present in software versions -611 and -611-71x: In function groups CBF_2 to CBF_4 the parameter "Delay/fault beh. CB" (addresses 022 227, 022 240 and 022 254) cannot be set to 'Blocked'. It is not possible to completely switch off this sub-function. This does not cause a problem regarding protection functionality as, firstly, the same effect is achieved by setting a timer stage with a delay time of 100 s and, secondly, the signal "Fault behind CB" may be ignored by not using it. Only with version -611 the following links exist for timer stages 't1 3p' and 't2' (bug fixed as of version -611-716):

Timer stages C B F _ 2 : t 1 3 p ; C B F _ 3 : t 1 3 p ; C B F _ 4 : t 1 3 p are processed as 'blocked' if C B F _ 1 : t 1 3 p is set to 'Blocked'. Timer stages C B F _ 2 : t 2 ; C B F _ 3 : t 2 ; C B F _ 4 : t 2 are processed as 'blocked' if C B F _ 1 : t 2 is set to 'Blocked' . If these timer stages in CBF_1 are not set to 'Blocked' the timer stages in CBF_2 to CBF_4 will be processed as set. If 'Blocked' has been selected for this setting then a delay time of 655.35 s will become effective.

Note: In the default setting, these timer stages are not set to 'Blocked' so that the above links will have no effect. However, should a timer stage in CBF_1 be set to 'Blocked' and should this function later be disabled and de-configured, then the setting 'Blocked' will remain effective as described above.

U-38

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Disabling or enabling the CBF function

The activation of the function is enabled at C B F : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . If this enabling function has been activated, CBF can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The front panel HMI and the binary signal inputs have equal priority in this regard. If only the function C B F _ 1 : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then CBF will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the parameter C B F _ 1 : D i s a b l e E X T has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.

CBF_1: General enable USER [ 022 080 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes CBF_1: General enable . [ 040 055 ]

INP: Fct. assignm . U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U x1 U x2 U x3 U xx Address Address 038 041 038 042 CBF_1: Ext./user enabled [ 038 040 ] CBF_ 1: Enable EXT [ 038 041 ] CBF_1: Enable USER [ 003 016 ] 0 1 0: Don't execute 1: Execute CBF_ 1: Disable EXT [ 038 042 ] CBF_1: Disable USER [ 003 015 ] 0 1 0: Don't execute 1: Execute 64Z1101 A_EN

U-18

Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-39

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Readiness of circuit breaker protection

Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available should one of the following conditions be met:

The CBF function is not activated. Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input. All CBF timer stages have been set to 'Blocked'.

CBF_1: Enabled [ 040 055 ] & CBF_1: Blocking EXT [ 038 058 ] CBF_1: t1 3p [ 022 165 ] Blocked CBF_1: t2 [ 022 166 ] Blocked CBF_1: Delay/ Starting Trig . [ 022 155 ] Blocked CBF_1: Delay/Fault Beh. CB [ 022 171 ] Blocked CBF_1: Delay/CB Sync.Superv [ 022 172 ] Blocked

CBF_1: Not Ready [ 040 025 ] CBF_1: Ready [ 038 009 ]

&

64Z1102 B_UK

U-19

CBF readiness

U-40

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Detecting a CB tripping

A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB tripping. Protection functions that have triggering criteria not directly dependent on current flow (e.g. V<>), may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.

Current flow monitoring

This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and pole selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values from the selected end with the set threshold value C B F : I < . As long as current flow criteria are met the phase-selective signals C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w A , C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w B , C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w C and the multiple signal C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w P h x will be continuously issued.

CBF_1: I< [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC CBF_1: Current A [ 038 230 ] CBF_1: Current B [ 038 231 ] CBF_1: Current C [ 038 232 ] CBF_1: Current Phx [ 038 233 ] Flow Flow Flow Flow

>1

64Z1103 B_UK

U-20

Current flow monitoring

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-41

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Evaluation of CB status signals

Trip signals included in the general trip command which use status signals provided by the CB auxiliary contacts in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x . Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available. The P63x can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate them:

The 'Open' signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T The 'Closed' signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B x c l o s e d 3 p E X T

Note: Each circuit breaker CBx is permanently assigned to the respective CBF_x functions. P631+P632: x = 1, 2; P633: x = 1, 2, 3; P634: x = 1, 2, 3, 4. The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will result in the P63x issuing the signal C B F : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e . Evaluation of current criteria is not affected by this blocking. If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P63x. As an alternative the status signals from the external device (as of version -620) may be used by the P632 and P633. (See section 2.6.4 'Coupling between control and protection for the CB signals'.) Assigning necessary for this is carried out with the parameters M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n or M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d . Status signals from external devices are processed similar to CB status signals M A I N : C B x o p e n 3 p E X T and M A I N : C B x c l o s e d 3 p E X T . (P632: x = 1, 2; P633: x = 1, 2, 3.)

U-42

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

INP: Fct. U xxx Assign [ xxx yyy ] U x01 U x02 U x03 U xxx Address Address MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT [ * ] MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT [ * ] 031 028 036 051 & & CBF_x: CB Pos. Implausible [ * ]

&

&

x: 1 MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT 031 028

x: 2 031 046 036 230 043 086

x: 3 031 047 036 231 043 116

x: 4 031 048 036 232 043 146 64Z7031 B_UK

MAIN: CBx Closed 036 051 3p EXT CBF_x: CB Pos. Implausible 038 210

U-21

Plausibility check of CB status signals

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-43

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Startup criteria

The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following startup criteria are evaluated:

Internal startup criterion: Generating the specific general trip signal, which has been selected by setting parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n . s t a r t i n g , is considered a startup criterion. In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter C B F _ 1 : S t a r t w i t h m a n . t r i p , that a manual trip signal will also be used as a startup criterion. External startup criterion: Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (C B F _ 1 : S t a r t 3 p E X T ) may be used as a startup criterion. To be on the safe side an additional two pole triggering may be implemented by applying the signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t e n a b l e E X T .

In any case, current flow monitoring is the preferred (primary) monitoring criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts are only evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective trip signal, included in the general trip command, has been selected from the protection function in parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x for the evaluation of the CB auxiliary contacts. Note: With the implementation of software version -611 the startup criterion could disappear when the assigned general trip signal or the external startup criterion dropped out. This happened independently of current flow criteria and CB status signal criteria. The startup criterion has been modified as of software version -620. After a CBF startup has occurred the status of the general trip signal or the external startup signal are now no longer considered. Therefore CBF will drop out only when the current criterion (current flow is below I< in all three phases) is met or when the CB status is identified as open. Timers and tripping logic Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.

The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time delay, set at timer stage C B F _ 1 : t 1 3 p , has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil. The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l t 2 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time delay, set at timer stage C B F _ 1 : t 2 , has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection system.

These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met. Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB_ 1 fault the elapsing of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to the binary signal input appropriately configured at C B F _ 1 : C B f a u l t y E X T .

U-44

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CBF_1: Fct. Assignm. CBAux. [ 022 159 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal n Selected signals CBF_1: CB Pos . Implausible [ 038 210 ] CBF_1: I< [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p [ 031 042 ] CBF_1: Start with Man.Trip [ 022 154 ] >1 & S 1 R 1 1
>1

m out of n

& &

0 1
0: No 1: Yes

>1

& >1

CBF_1: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ]

>1

&

INP: Fct.Assign. Starting [ 022 202 ] Gen Trip Signal 1 Gen Trip Signal 2 Gen Trip Signal 3 Gen Trip Signal 4 & >1 MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 1 [ 036 005 ] & MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 2 [ 036 023 ] & MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 3 [ 036 108 ] & MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 4 [ 036 109 ] & MAIN: Trip Cmd . Blocked [ 021 013 ] MAIN: Man. Aus Signal [ 034 017 ] INP: Fct. U xxx Assign [ xxx yyy ] U x01 U x02 U x03 U xnn CBF_1: Start Enable EXT [ 038 209 ] CBF_1: Start 3p EXT [ 038 206 ] Address 038 209 & & >1 & >1

&

64Z1104 B_UK

U-22

Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection in software version -611

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-45

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CBF_1: Fct. Assignm. CBAux. [ 022 159 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal n

m out of n

Selected signals CBF_1: CB Pos . Implausible [ 038 210 ] CBF_1: I< [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] & & S 1 R 1 1 & &

CBF_1: Start with Man.Trip [ 022 154 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes CBF_1: Fct. Assign. Starting [ 022 202 ] Gen Trip Signal 1 Gen Trip Signal 2 Gen Trip Signal 3 Gen Trip Signal 4 MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 1 [ 036 005 ] MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 2 [ 036 023 ] MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 3 [ 036 108 ] MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 4 [ 036 109 ] MAIN: Trip Cmd . Blocked [ 021 013 ] MAIN: Manual Trip Signal [ 034 017 ] INP: Fct. U xxx Assign [ xxx yyy ] U x01 U x02 U x03 U xnn CBF_1: Start Enable EXT [ 038 209 ] CBF_1: Start 3p EXT [ 038 206 ] Address 038 209 & & & &

& &

S 1 R 1

CBF_1: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ]

& & &

&

&

64Z1104 C_UK

U-23

Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection in software version -620


P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-46

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CBF_1: Not Ready [ 040 025 ] CBF_1: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ]

CBF_1: t1 3p C [ 022 165 ] t 0 CBF_1: Trip Signal t 1 [ 038 215 ]

CBF_1: t2 C [ 022 166 ] t 0 CBF_1: Trip Signal t 2 [ 038 219 ] CBF_1: CB Failure [ 036 017 ]

& CBF_1: CB Faulty EXT [ 038 234 ]

64Z1105 B_UK

U-24

Timer stages of the circuit breaker failure protection

Trip commands

While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available the user can set minimum time delays for trip commands. By appropriate setting it can further be determined that trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

CBF_1: Min.Dur. Trip Cmd .t1 [ 022 167 ] MAIN: Trip Cmd . Blocked [ 021 013 ] CBF_1: Trip Signal t 1 [ 038 215 ] CBF_1: Latching Trip Cmd.t1 [ 022 169 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes & CBF_1: Trip Signal t 2 [ 038 219 ] CBF_1: Latching Trip Cmd.t2 [ 022 170 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Latch. Trip c Reset [ 040 139 ] 64Z1106 B_UK & S R 1 1 1
>1 >1

&

>1

CBF_1: Trip Command t 1 [ 038 220 ]

&

S R

1 1 1 CBF_1: Min.Dur. Trip Cmd .t2 [ 022 168 ] t 0


>1

CBF_1: Trip Command t 2 [ 038 224 ]

U-25

Trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-47

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Starting trigger

Should a downstream CB fail, a trip can be issued by the CB failure protection function. In this case the dedicated general interrogation is checked as a condition so as to guarantee increased security against overreaction. The signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t i n g will be issued when the signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t i n g t r i g . E X T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a general starting is present. The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l will be issued after timer stage C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / s t a r t i n g t r i g . has elapsed.

CBF_1: Delay/ Starting Trig . [ 022 155 ] MAIN: General Start [ 036 000 ] CBF_1: Starting Trig. EXT [ 038 016 ] &

CBF_1: Trip Signal [ 040 026 ] CBF_1: Starting [ 038 021 ]

64Z1107 B_UK

U-26

Starting trigger

Fault behind CB protection

A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end. Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion, if the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed after the time delay set at C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed. When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal C B F _ 1 : F a u l t b e h i n d C B is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM teleprotection interface. This may also prevent an unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker failure function.

CBF_1: CB Pos. Implausible [ 038 210 ] CBF_1: I< [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] & &

CBF_1: Delay/ Fault Beh. CB [ 022 171 ] t 0 CBF_1: Fault behind CB [ 038 225 ]

64Z1108 C_UK

U-27

Fault behind CB protection

U-48

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CB synchronization supervision

CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the time delay C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / C B s y n c . s u p e r v can be used. When this time delay has elapsed the signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p S i g C B s y n c . s u p e r is issued. Poles that are recognized as being 'open' will still be signaled.

CBF_1: CB Pos. Implausible [ 038 210 ] MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] CBF_1: I< [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC & &

CBF_1: Delay/ CB Sync .Superv [ 022 172 ] t 0 CBF_1: TripSig CBsync.Super [ 038 226 ]

<3

&

CBF_1: CBsync.Superv A Open [ 038 227 ] CBF_1: CBsync.Superv B Open [ 038 228 ] CBF_1: CBsync.Superv C Open [ 038 229 ] 64Z1109 C_UK

& &

U-28

CB synchronization supervision

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-49

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8

Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV03) (P632, P633 only)

The P63x is designed to control up to 3 switchgear units. The Bay Panel defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units. Defining a bay type With the selection of a Bay type, the following definitions are made:

Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed. Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P63x. The bay interlock conditions for the 'Open' / 'Close' command control of the switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock function.

When a Bay type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status signals and the output relays for control commands are configured automatically if M A I N : A u t o a s s i g n m e n t I / O is set to 'Yes'. If set to 'No', the user will need to carry out this configuration. The list of Bay types in the Appendix shows which binary inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of switchgear units in the case of automatic configuration. Setting options for the P63x and the different possibilities to integrate a switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P63x (processing of status signals only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below, using one switchgear unit as an example. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. If a signal is identified in the function diagrams by function group "C O M M 1 :" with a blank address [--- ---], it will indicate that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it has not been assigned an address. Signals listed in the function diagrams as signal 1 to signal n are specified in the configuration tables of the Address List.

U-50

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8.1

Processing Status Signals from a Manually Operated Switchgear Unit (P632, P633 only)

The status signals Open and Closed are assigned to binary signal inputs. The signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see section Main Functions of the P63x) are used for further processing. If no logic value of ' 1 ' is present at any of the two binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring function is started. For the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either Open or Closed - the signal Intermediate position is issued. If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is in the intermediate position. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled. The signal 'Faulty Pos.' is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their 'Open' or 'Closed' position after the set time delay for running time monitoring and the delay time set in M A I N : D e l a y M a n . O p . S u p e r v . have elapsed. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time delay has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled. Switch truck For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is set to Open while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-51

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-29

Processing status signals from a manually operated switchgear unit


P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-52

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8.2 Local or remote control of external devices

Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units (P632, P633 only)

Usually, remote control of external devices is carried out via the communication interface and local control via appropriately configured function keys on the front panel HMI. Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled via binary inputs configured appropriately (configuration via D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r l . o p e n or D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r . c l o s e ). The setting at M A I N : E l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l determines whether the inputs function as remote or local control points. Dependent on the respective position of control the P63x will issue the following logic state signals:

MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf MAIN: Command from HMI MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl

or

or

Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating data memory:

DEVxx: Open cmd. received DEVxx: Close cmd. received

Selecting the switchgear unit to be controlled and generating a switching request

The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the front panel HMI using the selection key and pressing the Open or Close key to generate the switching request. (It should be noted that the front panel HMI on the P63x does not feature specific keys for switching functions. If at this point mention of a selection key is made, then this would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned in this example M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y . (See section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx, particularly as control keys'.) For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the communication interface, the control commands Open or Close will also address the switchgear unit to be controlled.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-53

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

LOC: Loc.acc. block.active [ 221 005 ] LOC: Return t. illum. trg


305 550

MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. [ 221 018 ]

DEV01

DEV01: Open request


307 000

DEV01: Close request 307 001

MAIN: Electrical control [ 221 061 ] 2: Local 1: Remote

LOC:Rem.acc.block. active [ 221 004 ]


DEV01: Inp.asg.el. ctrl.open [ 210 019 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Selected signal DEV01: Inp.asg.el. ctr.close [ 210 020 ]

Selected signal

COMM1: Open Command DEV 01 [ --- --- ] COMM1: Close Command DEV 01 [ --- --- ]
DEV01: Latching time [ 210 005 ]

DEV01: Open cmd . received [ 218 000 ] DEV01: Close cmd . received [ 218 001 ]

MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf [ 221 101 ]

DEV01: End open command 307 002 DEV01: End close command
307 003

MAIN: End command


306 028

DEV01: Latching time elaps .


307 012

DEV01: Latching time runn . 307 011

12Z62AAA_EN

U-30

Generating a switching request with remote control via the communication interface

U-54

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Enabling switching commands

Before a switching command is executed, the P63x checks the interlocking conditions defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is permitted or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or without the station interlock function can be defined. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching command determines the interlocking conditions that define, for example, the conditions for the 'Open' command for operation without the station interlock function.

U-31

Assignment of equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands and enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock function

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-55

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Bay interlock for operation with the station interlock function

For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be a communication link with the substation control level. If the P63x detects a communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there will be an automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function. If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function, the bay interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching enable, a switching request will be sent to the substation control level. At substation control level, there will then be a check taking into account the station interlock functions as to whether switching is permitted or not. If the substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay interlock is still present. Optionally, the Open or Close switching operation can be carried out without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will be considered.

U-32

Enabling of switching commands by the station interlock

U-56

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Linking protection commands to switching commands

For circuit breakers, the Open command can be linked to the protection trip signals. The 'Close' command can also be linked to the close command of the protection functions. The Bay Panel defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers. The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed directly without a check of the interlocking conditions.

U-33

Linking to the protection commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-57

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Issuing switching commands

Dependent on the operating mode (set at D E V x x : O p e r . m o d e c m d . ) set for commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or according to time control. If the operating mode time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the control process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts. It will then be necessary to set the P63x at M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . to 'Yes' and binary signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination contacts.

External termination control

U-58

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Protection trip cmd .


307 013

DEV01: Protect. close cmd .


307 014

MAIN: Cmd. Dur.Long Cmd . [ 221 230 ] MAIN: Cmd. Dur. Short Cmd . [ 221 231 ] DEV01: Oper. Mode Cmd . [ 210 024 ] 1 2 3 1: Long command 2: Short command 3: Time control

DEV01: Open Command [ 210 028 ] MAIN: Device On-Line [ 003 030 ] 1: No (= off) MAIN: Enable Control [ 221 058 ] MAIN: Type of Bay [ 221 001 ] DEV01: Enable SI Open
307 004

DEV01: Close Command [ 210 029 ]

DEV01: Enable BI Open


307 019

DEV01: Open request 307 000

DEV01: Enable SI Close


307 005

DEV01: Enable BI Close


307 020

DEV01: Close request


307 001

63Z70AGA_UK

U-34

Issuing of switching commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-59

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Time control of switching commands

As the switching command ends, running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is started. The P63x expects a status signal Open or Closed to be issued by the switchgear unit within the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring. The status signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at appropriately configured binary inputs on the P63x, which can be set to debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see description for Debouncing and Chatter Suppression in section 'Main Functions of the P63x'). For the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either Open or Closed - the signal Intermediate position is issued. If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is in the intermediate position. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled. If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their Open or Closed position after the set time delay for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal 'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time delay has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled. If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'No) the switching command is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the Open or Closed position status signal is received or the set time delay for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Figure U-30). If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'Yes) the switching command is terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is issued while the set time delay for running time monitoring is active.

Switch truck

For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is set to Open while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.

U-60

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Interm. Pos. Suppr. [ 210 012 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes

DEV01: Inp.Asg. Sw.Tr. Plug [ 210 014 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Disabled Selected signal DEV01: Switch. Device Open [ 210 036 ] DEV01: Switch . Device Closed [ 210 037 ] DEV01: Dev. Interm./Flt.Pos [ 210 038 ] Selected group S1 1 R1 S1 1 C R1

DEV01: Gr. Assign . Debounc. [ 210 011 ]

DEV01: Open Signal EXT [ 210 030 ]

S1 1 Debouncing & Chatter suppression R1 DEV01: End Open Command DEV01: Op.Time Switch . Dev. [ 210 004 ]
307 002

DEV01: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 031 ]

DEV01: End Close Command


307 003

DEV01: Open Command [ 210 028 ] DEV01: Close Command [ 210 029 ] DEV01: Start runn.time mon .
307 008

DEV01: Switch. Device runn .


307 010

DEV01: Stat. Ind.Interm.Pos. [ 210 027 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes 0 1 2 3 0 ... 3 0: 1: 2: 3: Intermediate pos . Open Closed Faulty position 12Z51AKB_UK DEV01: Control State [ 210 018 ]

U-35

Monitoring of switching commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-61

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Time monitoring without external run-back of command, example for switching operation close

DEV01: Close command 210 029

1
3

DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036

DEV01: Switch. device closed 210 037


4

10 ms DEV01: Latching time


DEV01: Op.time switch. dev.
210 005
210 004

19Z5201A_EN

U-36

Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control

U-62

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Time monitoring with external run-back of command, example for switching operation close

DEV01: Close command 210 029


1 3

DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036

DEV01: Switch. device closed 210 037

DEV01:Inp.asg. end Close 210 016

1 3

10 ms DEV01: Latching time 210 005

19Z5202A_EN
U-37 Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-63

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Monitoring the number of CB operations permitted

The maximum number of CB operations within a specific time delay may be set with parameter M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . Associated with this parameter is the counter at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . to which the maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge of an event is present that has been selected by a '1 out of n' parameter at M A I N : C B 1 r e a d y f c t . a s s i g n . The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n and D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d . The counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . may only be decremented to a value of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control functionality, in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB fault has occurred (i.e. M A I N : C B 1 f a u l t y E X T is set to 'Yes') the counter M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . is immediately set to 1.

U-64

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.9

Interlocking Logic (Function group ILOCK) - (P632, P633 only)

Commands issued to electrically controllable switchgear units within the bay are only enabled after a check of the interlock conditions has been carried out. Interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic by Boolean equations. With the selection of a bay type the bay interlock conditions are defined automatically for the 'Open' and 'Close' commands to control switchgear units within the bay. Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station interlock (see 'List of Bay Types' in the Appendix). These interlock conditions, defined automatically with the selection of a bay type, can always be modified to system requirements by the user. The following signals acquired by the P63x can be logically linked for the bay interlock.

Function blocks 1 and 2 The output signals from the programmable logic function The status signals, conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression, from switchgear units The status signals, conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression, from singlepole signals

A maximum of 32 equations, each with 32 equation elements, are available to define the interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR. The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher ordinal number equation as an input signal thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-65

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-38

Interlock logic shown in the example for equation 1

U-66

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.10 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) - (P632, P633 only) Commands may be transmitted to the P63x via the communications interface. When the P63x receives such a command, and the remote control mode is enabled, an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal will be issued. The operating mode may be selected individually for each single-pole command. The following operating mode settings are available:

Long Command Short Command Persistent Command

If the operating mode 'long' or 'short' command has been selected the output relay will be triggered for the time delay set at M A I N : C m d . d u r . l o n g c m d . or MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. The setting possibilities and the functional sequence is displayed in the example for Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.

U-39

Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Command C001

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-67

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.11

Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) - (P632, P633 only)

Binary single-pole signals issued by the system and presented to appropriately configured binary inputs can be transmitted by the P63x to the control station. A binary input signal is conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see section Main Functions of the P63x). Such a conditioned signal is available as a logic signal at SIG_1: Logic signal Sxxx. The signaling behavior over the communication interface is defined by the setting of the operating mode. The following operating mode settings are available:

Without Function Start/End Signal Transient Signal

If 'Without function' has been set then no message will be sent when the state at the binary signal input changes. If 'Start/End Signal' has been set then a message will be sent any time the state at the binary signal input changes. The 'Start Signal' must remain at logic ' 1 ' for the set minimum time in order to be accepted and sent with the message. If 'Transient Signal' has been set then messages will only be sent when the state at the binary signal input changes from logic ' 0 ' to logic ' 1 ' The following diagram shows setting options and the functional sequence in the example for Signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole signals.

U-68

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-40

Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Signal S001

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-69

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

3 3.1 Application

Design Detachable HMI

As a further option in the model versions P631 to P634 there is now (as of version -611) a variant available that includes a detachable HMI. This variant is especially designed for applications where protection and control units are directly installed into bay panels situated in medium-voltage substations and, because of structural constraints, there is only limited space available. The detachable HMI with its small dimensions may be fitted here in a convenient spot and at an ergonomic height. Detachable HMI Configuration and operation of the protection and control unit is carried out from the integrated front panel user interface (HMI) or via the PC interface on the detachable HMI which is designed in 40TE width. To connect the detachable HMI to the protection and control unit, standard RJ45 cables (Ethernet cable, length max. 10 m) may be used. A 3 m standard RJ45 Ethernet cable is included with the shipment. A connection to the detachable HMI may be established or separated at any time as the detachable HMI is recognized automatically and completely. Basic unit For the detachable HMI option, the basic unit is available with case widths of 40TE or 84TE in either a flush-mounted or a surface-mounted case and is provided in several variants for an effortless adaptation to meet local operating conditions. The front plate includes 4 LED indicators for display purposes as well as the RJ45 interface to connect the detachable HMI. Operation without the detachable HMI The function of the protection and control unit is fully guaranteed even when the detachable HMI is not connected or the communication link between detachable HMI and the basic unit is interrupted. In such a case the basic unit is accessed via its PC interface. The function parameters for the front panel user interface (HMI) and for LED indicators, available only on the detachable HMI, are automatically hidden in this event. LED indicators on the detachable HMI The freely configurable LED indicators H4 to H16 on the detachable HMI offer multi-color function assignment. Separate function assignments for the red and the green LED color indications are available. When both the red and the green LED indicators are simultaneously active the resulting color will be amber (yellow). Function keys on the detachable HMI The new detachable HMI provides 6 freely configurable function keys. Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as well as in this chapter in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'

U-70

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

12Z61TDA

U-41

Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case front view.

12Z61ABA

U-42

Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case and detachable HMI front view The detachable HMI on the basic unit with 84TE case also has a width of 40TE.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6-S // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-71

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

49Z6202A

U-43

Detachable HMI rear view

U-72

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4 4.1 Display and Keypad

User Interface (HMI) Display and Keypad

The front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric characters. Then there are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the LCD and, with 40TE case (P631, P632, P633) and 84TE case (P632, P633, P634) devices, there are (as of version -611) six additional freely configurable function keys situated to the right of the LCD. Furthermore the front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with 17 LED indicators, mounted vertically to the left of the LCD and there are six additional LED indicators situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys. Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as well as in this chapter in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'

U-44

View of the front panel HMI

P63X/EN AD/Ak6-S // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

H4 H3 H2 H1 H17 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16

TRIP ALARM O UT O F SE RV ICE HE ALTHY E DIT MO DE

F1 F2

H18

H19

C
G G

F3 F4 F5 F6

H20

H21

H22

H23

12 Z6100B_EN

U-73

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Availability of the bay panel Only the protection units P632 and P633 provide bay panels under the following conditions: 1. On the hardware side the protection unit has to have been upgraded with a control functionality. This requires that the optional binary I/O module to control switchgear units has been ordered and is fitted to a slot. 2. A further condition is that the protection units are fitted with a communication module with selectable communication protocol or the Ethernet module as well as with the new front panel user interface (HMI) that includes function keys. 3. A bay type has been selected with parameter M A I N : T y p e o f b a y . Bay panels If available the bay panel will display switching state signals from external devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or remote). The text display will show up to 3 external devices, one per line, where the external device selected is marked with the flashing ">" symbol to the left of the external devices designation text.
X0 :Interm. pos. >Q0 :Interm. pos. Q8 :Interm. pos. Local Locked

U-45

Example of a bay panel

The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there are up to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their current state is displayed ('Interm. pos.', 'Open', 'Closed' or 'Faulty pos.'). The active control unit ('Remote' or 'Local') is displayed in the fourth line and whether it is 'Locked' or 'Unlocked'. Keys In addition to the keys documented in the operating manual there are now (as of version -611) six freely configurable function keys available:

Function keys to By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered. More details on assigning functions to function keys can be found in section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)". More details on handling function keys can be found in this chapter, in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.

F1

F6

U-74

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4.2 Function keys available as of version -611

Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)

If they have not been configured as control keys, function keys F1 to Fx are enabled only after the password for function keys has been entered. Exception: If a function key has been configured at M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y the function will only switch from 'Remote' to 'Local' control after the password has been entered, but switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control will occur without checking the password (see also section 4.3). It is assumed for the remainder of this section that the function key F1 is enabled only after the password (as assigned at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 ) has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. For this example it is further assumed that the password for the function keys is the factory-set password. If the user has changed the password (see the chapter entitled "Changing the Password"), the following description will apply accordingly.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-75

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Control Step / Description

Control Action

Display
Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A

0 Example of a display. 1 Function key F1 is pressed.

Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to enter the password.

F1

********
G G

2a Press the following keys in sequence:


'Left' 'Down'

*
G G

*
G G

'Right'

*
G G

'Up The display will change as shown in the column on the right. Now press the ENTER key. If the correct password has been entered, the active display will re-appear. Function key F1 is now active for the set return time. (Each function key is protected by its own password, and the return time elapses individually for each function key after the correct password has been entered! If an invalid password has been entered, the display shown above in Step 1 will appear.

*
Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A

2b This control step can be cancelled at any


time by pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is pressed. Press F1 again. The function configured to this function key is carried out.

Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A

F1

4 When function keys are pressed while the


return time period of the function key is elapsing, then the configured function is carried out directly, e.g. without again checking for the password. U-76

Fx

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4.3

Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx, particularly as Control Keys (P632, P633 only)

Function keys as control keys, as of version -620 As described in section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)" in Chapter 3 function keys F1 to Fx may be configured as control keys at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6). In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see the previous section) and the configuration to 'Key/Switch' is ignored. In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the four function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter. MAIN: Local/Remote key The 'Local/Remote' control command is effective only in the bay panel except where a binary signal input has been configured for this function. Depending on the functionality set at H M I : F c t . A s s i g n . L / R k e y , the 'Local/Remote' command toggles either between 'Remote' and 'Local' control, or between 'Local/Remote' and 'Local' control. (The parameter H M I : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y may be set either to R <-> L or to R & L <-> L and will then define which of the two switching modes is active.) If the 'Local/Remote' command is configured such that it will switch from 'Remote' control to 'Local' control, then this can only occur if the password has first been entered at H M I : P a s s w o r d L / R . Switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control will occur without checking the password. (See also section "Configuring the Measured Value Panels and Selection of the Control Point (Function Group HMI)".) MAIN: Device selection key This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if 'Local' control is activated. If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on the text display with the flashing symbol ">" in front of the external devices designation text. MAIN: Device OPEN key The 'OPEN' command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit taking into account the interlock equation to assume the 'open' status. MAIN: Device CLOSE key The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-77

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

5 5.1

Settings Parameters Device Identification

5.1.1 Device

001 000 DVICE: AFS Order No. Order number for the device. This number cannot be altered by the user.

5.1.2 User interface

Configuration Parameters

221 040 LOC: Password L/R The password used to change the setting from 'Remote' to 'Local' control can be defined here. (Switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control occurs without checking the password.) 221 070 LOC: Display L/R This setting defines whether the control site 'Local' or 'Remote' shall be displayed on the bay panel.

LOC: Displ. interl. stat. This setting defines whether the 'Locked' or 'Unlocked' status shall be displayed on the bay panel.

221 071

225 208 LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches between remote / local control (LR) or between 'Remote' and 'Local' control / 'Local' control (R&LL).

LOC: Return time select. If the user does not press a key on the front panel user interface (HMI) during this set time period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.

221 030

Communication interface 1

003 178 COMM1: -103 prot. variant The user may select either the AREVA D or the VDEW variant of the 103 protocol.

Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.

IEC 61850 Communication

IEC: Update Measurements Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy.

104 229

104 230 IEC: Dead band IP Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d I P

U-78

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

104 231 IEC: Dead band IN Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d I N 104 232 IEC: Dead band VPP Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d V P P 104 233 IEC: Dead band VPG Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : Dead band VPG 104 234 IEC: Dead band f Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d f 104 235 IEC: Dead band P Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d P 104 236 IEC: Dead band phi Setting to calculate the filter value for all Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d p h i 104 237 IEC: Dead band Z Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d Z 104 238 IEC: Dead band min/max Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d m i n / m a x

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-79

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

104 239 IEC: Dead band ASC Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d A S C 104 240 IEC: Dead band temp. Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d t e m p . 104 241 IEC: Dead band 20mA Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d 2 0 m A 221 081 IEC: DEV control model Setting of which control model is to be used to control all external devices. Suggested setting when performing switching operations at maximum safety is SBO enh. Security (SBO = Select-Before-Operate).

U-80

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Generic Object Oriented Substation Event

108 000 GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Applic. ID 108 010 GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Applic. ID 108 020 GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Applic. ID 108 030 GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Applic. ID 108 040 GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Applic. ID 108 050 GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Applic. ID 108 060 GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Applic. ID 108 070 GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Applic. ID 108 080 GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Applic. ID 108 090 GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Applic. ID 108 100 GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Applic. ID 108 110 GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Applic. ID 108 120 GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Applic. ID 108 130 GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Applic. ID 108 140 GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Applic. ID 108 150 GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Applic. ID 110 000 GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Applic. ID 110 010 GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Applic. ID 110 020 GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Applic. ID 110 030 GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Applic. ID 110 040 GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Applic. ID 110 050 GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Applic. ID 110 060 GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Applic. ID 110 070 GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Applic. ID 110 080 GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Applic. ID 110 090 GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Applic. ID 110 100 GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Applic. ID 110 110 GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Applic. ID 110 120 GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Applic. ID 110 130 GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Applic. ID 110 140 GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Applic. ID 110 150 GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Applic. ID Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Goose ID GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Goose ID
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

108 001 108 011 108 021 108 031 108 041 108 051 108 061 108 071 108 081 108 091 108 101 108 111 108 121 108 131 108 141 108 151 110 001

U-81

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

110 011 GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Goose ID 110 021 GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Goose ID 110 031 GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Goose ID 110 041 GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Goose ID 110 051 GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Goose ID 110 061 GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Goose ID 110 071 GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Goose ID 110 081 GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Goose ID 110 091 GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Goose ID 110 101 GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Goose ID 110 111 GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Goose ID 110 121 GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Goose ID 110 131 GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Goose ID 110 141 GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Goose ID 110 151 GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Goose ID Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. Virtual GOOSE inputs can be linked with interlocking equations of assigned external devices.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataSetRef GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataSetRef

108 002 108 012 108 022 108 032 108 042 108 052 108 062 108 072 108 082 108 092 108 102 108 112 108 122 108 132 108 142 108 152 110 002 110 012 110 022 110 032 110 042 110 052 110 062 110 072 110 082 110 092 110 102 110 112 110 122 110 132

U-82

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

110 142 GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataSetRef 110 152 GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataSetRef 'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered. 108 003 GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataObjInd 108 013 GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataObjInd 108 023 GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataObjInd 108 033 GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataObjInd 108 043 GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataObjInd 108 053 GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataObjInd 108 063 GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataObjInd 108 073 GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataObjInd 108 083 GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataObjInd 108 093 GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataObjInd 108 103 GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataObjInd 108 113 GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataObjInd 108 123 GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataObjInd 108 133 GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataObjInd 108 143 GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataObjInd 108 153 GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataObjInd 110 003 GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataObjInd 110 013 GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataObjInd 110 023 GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataObjInd 110 033 GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataObjInd 110 043 GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataObjInd 110 053 GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataObjInd 110 063 GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataObjInd 110 073 GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataObjInd 110 083 GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataObjInd 110 093 GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataObjInd 110 103 GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataObjInd 110 113 GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataObjInd 110 123 GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataObjInd 110 133 GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataObjInd 110 143 GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataObjInd 110 153 GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataObjInd Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A data object index indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatAttrInd GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DatAttrInd GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DatAttrInd GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DatAttrInd GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DatAttrInd GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DatAttrInd GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DatAttrInd
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

108 004 108 014 108 024 108 034 108 044 108 054 108 064

U-83

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

108 074 GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DatAttrInd 108 084 GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DatAttrInd 108 094 GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DatAttrInd 108 104 GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DatAttrInd 108 114 GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DatAttrInd 108 124 GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DatAttrInd 108 134 GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DatAttrInd 108 144 GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DatAttrInd 108 154 GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DatAttrInd 110 004 GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DatAttrInd 110 014 GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DatAttrInd 110 024 GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DatAttrInd 110 034 GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DatAttrInd 110 044 GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DatAttrInd 110 054 GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DatAttrInd 110 064 GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DatAttrInd 110 074 GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DatAttrInd 110 084 GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DatAttrInd 110 094 GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DatAttrInd 110 104 GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DatAttrInd 110 114 GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DatAttrInd 110 124 GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DatAttrInd 110 134 GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DatAttrInd 110 144 GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DatAttrInd 110 154 GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DatAttrInd Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A data object index indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 default GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 default U-84

108 005 108 015 108 025 108 035 108 045 108 055 108 065 108 075 108 085 108 095 108 105 108 115 108 125 108 135 108 145 108 155 110 005 110 015 110 025 110 035 110 045 110 055 110 065

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

110 075 GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 default 110 085 GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 default 110 095 GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 default 110 105 GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 default 110 115 GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 default 110 125 GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 default 110 135 GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 default 110 145 GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 default 110 155 GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 default Default for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-85

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Binary input

010 220 Fig. 3-23 INP: Filter Input filter which is activated when either the mode 'Active "High", Filt.' or 'Active "Low", Filt.' has been selected. In order to suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to set this parameter to 6 [steps]. See Chapter 'Operation' for further information.

Main function

MAIN: Type of bay Configuration of a bay type.

220 001

221 062 MAIN: Customized bay type If a user-specific (customized) bay type has been loaded, its bay type number will be displayed. If no customized bay type has been loaded, the number ' 0 ' will be displayed.

External devices 01 to 03

210 047 DEV01: Function group DEV01 210 097 DEV02: Function group DEV02 210 147 DEV03: Function group DEV03 Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

DEV01: Funct. type, signal DEV02: Funct. type, signal DEV03: Funct. type, signal Setting the function type of the signal. Note:

210 034 210 084 210 134

If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2. DEV01: Inform. No., signal DEV02: Inform. No., signal DEV03: Inform. No., signal Setting the information number of the signal. Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3. DEV01: Funct. type, command DEV02: Funct. type, command DEV03: Funct. type, command Setting the function type of the command. Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2. U-86
210 032 210 082 210 132 210 035 210 085 210 135

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Inform. No., command DEV02: Inform. No., command DEV03: Inform. No., command Setting the information number of the command. Note:

210 033 210 083 210 133

If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3. Interlocking logic
250 102 ILOCK: Function group ILOCK Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

Single-pole commands

249 252 CMD_1: Function group CMD_1 Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. 200 004 CMD_1: Command C001 config. 200 009 CMD_1: Command C002 config. 200 014 CMD_1: Command C003 config. 200 019 CMD_1: Command C004 config. 200 024 CMD_1: Command C005 config. 200 029 CMD_1: Command C006 config. 200 034 CMD_1: Command C007 config. 200 039 CMD_1: Command C008 config. 200 044 CMD_1: Command C009 config. 200 049 CMD_1: Command C010 config. 200 054 CMD_1: Command C011 config. 200 059 CMD_1: Command C012 config. Cancelling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration. If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-87

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole signals

249 250 SIG_1: Function group SIG_1 Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.

SIG_1: Signal S001 config. SIG_1: Signal S002 config. SIG_1: Signal S003 config. SIG_1: Signal S004 config. SIG_1: Signal S005 config. SIG_1: Signal S006 config. SIG_1: Signal S007 config. SIG_1: Signal S008 config. SIG_1: Signal S009 config. SIG_1: Signal S010 config. SIG_1: Signal S011 config. SIG_1: Signal S012 config. Cancelling signals S001 to S012 or including them in the configuration. If any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden..

226 007 226 015 226 023 226 031 226 039 226 047 226 055 226 063 226 071 226 079 226 087 226 095

5.1.3 5.1.3.1 Main function

Function Settings Global

221 098 MAIN: Time tag For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse edge is detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating data memory are made in chronological order or not. 021 017 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 open 021 061 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 open 021 063 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB3 open 021 065 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB4 open Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to evaluate the 'CB open' position signal.

MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl. Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output enable. MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1 MAIN: Debounce time gr. 2 MAIN: Debounce time gr. 3 Setting the debouncing time. MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1 MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.2 MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.3 Setting the chatter monitoring time.

221 057

221 200 221 203 221 206

221 201 221 204 221 207

U-88

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

221 202 MAIN: Change of state gr.1 221 205 MAIN: Change of state gr.2 221 208 MAIN: Change of state gr.3 Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring time before chatter suppression operates.

MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd. Setting the command duration for a long command. MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. Setting the command duration for a short command. MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact Definition of the binary signal used to deactivate interlocking of control commands for switchgear.

221 230

221 231

221 007

221 008 MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw. Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local control. 221 065 MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O When a bay type is selected the binary inputs and outputs, required to control switchgear, are automatically configured with function assignments. 221 061 MAIN: Electrical control This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to control switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control 221 079 MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv. After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the signal "Sw. dev. interm. pos." already present and the status signal continuously absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from the respective binary inputs, will be issued. (See also "Processing status signals from manually operated switchgear") 221 063 MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin. This setting defines whether there is an intervention in the control process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts.

MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.

221 010

221 012 MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form the CB trip signal.

MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to signal the 'CB open' position signal.

221 013

021 020 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 closed 021 060 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 closed 021 062 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB3 closed 021 064 MAIN: Sig. asg. CB4 closed Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to evaluate the 'CB closed' position signal.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-89

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an external device.

221 050

221 024 MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external device. 221 051 MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 052 MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group signal).

5.1.3.2 Single-pole commands

General Functions
200 000 200 005 200 010 200 015 200 020 200 025 200 030 200 035 200 040 200 045 200 050 200 055

CMD_1: Design. command C001 CMD_1: Design. command C002 CMD_1: Design. command C003 CMD_1: Design. command C004 CMD_1: Design. command C005 CMD_1: Design. command C006 CMD_1: Design. command C007 CMD_1: Design. command C008 CMD_1: Design. command C009 CMD_1: Design. command C010 CMD_1: Design. command C011 CMD_1: Design. command C012 Selection of the command designation. CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C002 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C003 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C004 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C005 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C006 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C007 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C008 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C009 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C010 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C011 CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C012 Selection of the command operating mode.

200 002 200 007 200 012 200 017 200 022 200 027 200 032 200 037 200 042 200 047 200 052 200 057

U-90

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole signals

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S002 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S003 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S004 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S005 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S006 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S007 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S008 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S009 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S010 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S011 SIG_1: Designat. sig. S012 Selection of the signal designation. SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S002 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S003 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S004 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S005 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S006 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S007 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S008 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S009 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S010 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S011 SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S012 Selection of the signal operating mode.

226 000 226 008 226 016 226 024 226 032 226 040 226 048 226 056 226 064 226 072 226 080 226 088

226 001 226 009 226 017 226 025 226 033 226 041 226 049 226 057 226 065 226 073 226 081 226 089

226 003 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001 226 011 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S002 226 019 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S003 226 027 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S004 226 035 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S005 226 043 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S006 226 051 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S007 226 059 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S008 226 067 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S009 226 075 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S010 226 083 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S011 226 091 SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S012 Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-91

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

226 002 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001 226 010 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S002 226 018 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S003 226 026 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S004 226 034 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S005 226 042 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S006 226 050 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S007 226 058 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S008 226 066 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S009 226 074 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S010 226 082 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S011 226 090 SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S012 The logic ' 1 ' signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a telegram can be sent in the "Start/end signal" mode.

5.1.3.3 Main function

Setting Groups

019 017 019 057 019 061 019 065 MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PSx Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end A of the transformer. 019 018 019 058 019 062 019 066 MAIN: Vnom prim. end b PSx Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end B of the transformer. 019 019 019 059 019 063 019 067 MAIN: Vnom prim. end c PSx Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end C of the transformer. 019 037 019 060 019 064 019 068 MAIN: Vnom prim. end d PSx Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end D of the transformer.

5.1.3.4 Main function

Control

221 003 MAIN: BI active USER Selecting the bay interlocking function from the front panel user interface (HMI). 221 002 MAIN: SI active USER Selecting the station interlocking function from the front panel user interface (HMI).

MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1 MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2 Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2. MAIN: Op. delay fct. block Setting the operate delay of the function blocks.

221 014 221 022

221 029

221 084 MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. 221 088 MAIN: CB2 max. oper. cap. Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a limited time period).

U-92

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign MAIN: CB2 ready fct.assign Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . with the value at MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. DEV02: Designat. ext. dev. DEV03: Designat. ext. dev. Setting the designation of the respective external device. DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. DEV02: Op.time switch. dev. DEV03: Op.time switch. dev. Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device). DEV01: Latching time DEV02: Latching time DEV03: Latching time Setting the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear position signal "Open" or "Closed" has been received.

221 085 221 089

210 000 210 050 210 100

210 004 210 054 210 104

210 005 210 055 210 105

210 011 DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 061 DEV02: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 111 DEV03: Gr. assign. debounc. Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and chatter suppression. 210 012 DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 062 DEV02: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 112 DEV03: Interm. pos. suppr. This setting determines whether the 'intermediate position signal will be suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating. 210 027 DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 077 DEV02: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 127 DEV03: Stat.ind.interm.pos. This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s delay after the 'Faulty position' signal is issued.

DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. DEV02: Oper. mode cmd. DEV03: Oper. mode cmd. Select the operating mode of the command from long command, short command or time control. DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug DEV02: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug DEV03: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug Definition of the binary signal used to signal the position (plugged-in / unplugged) of the switch truck plug.

210 024 210 074 210 124

210 014 210 064 210 114

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-93

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

210 021 DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 071 DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 121 DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.1 This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by general trip command 1 of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as circuit breakers. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
210 022 DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 072 DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 122 DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.2 This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by general trip command 2 of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as circuit breakers. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
210 023 DEV01: With close cmd./prot 210 073 DEV02: With close cmd./prot 210 123 DEV03: With close cmd./prot This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the "close command" of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as circuit breakers. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
210 019 DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 069 DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 119 DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to move the switchgear unit to the open position.

Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be selected.
210 020 DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 070 DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 120 DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to move the switchgear unit to the 'Closed' position.

Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be selected. DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open DEV02: Inp. asg. end Open DEV03: Inp. asg. end Open This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the 'Open' command.
210 015 210 065 210 115

U-94

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close DEV02: Inp. asg. end Close DEV03: Inp. asg. end Close This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the 'Close' command. DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl DEV02: Open w/o stat.interl DEV03: Open w/o stat.interl This setting specifies whether switching to 'Open' position is permitted without a check by the station interlock function.

210 016 210 066 210 116

210 025 210 075 210 125

210 026 DEV01: Close w/o stat. int. 210 076 DEV02: Close w/o stat. int. 210 126 DEV03: Close w/o stat. int. This setting specifies whether switching to 'Closed' position is permitted without a check by the station interlock function.

DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI open DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI open This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'. Note:

210 039 210 089 210 139

The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment. DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'. Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.
210 040 210 090 210 140

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-95

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

210 041 DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 091 DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 141 DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.

Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.
210 042 DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 092 DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 142 DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.

Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.

U-96

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Interlocking logic

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.10 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.11 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.12 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.13 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.14 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.15 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.16 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.17 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.18 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.19 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.20 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.21 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.22 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.23 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.24 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.25 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.26 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.27 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.28 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.29 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.30 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.31 ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.32 Definition of the interlock conditions.

250 000 250 001 250 002 250 003 250 004 250 005 250 006 250 007 250 008 250 009 250 010 250 011 250 012 250 013 250 014 250 015 250 016 250 017 250 018 250 019 250 020 250 021 250 022 250 023 250 024 250 025 250 026 250 027 250 028 250 029 250 030 250 031

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-97

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

6 6.1

Information and Control Functions Healthy Cyclic Values Physical State Signals
152 144 152 147 152 150 152 153 152 162 152 165 152 168 152 171 152 174 152 177

6.1.1 6.1.1.1 Binary input

INP: State U 901 INP: State U 902 INP: State U 903 INP: State U 904 INP: State U 1001 INP: State U 1002 INP: State U 1003 INP: State U 1004 INP: State U 1005 INP: State U 1006 The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:

'Without function': 'Low': 'High':

No functions are assigned to the binary signal input. Not energized. Energized.

This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode set.

U-98

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Binary output

OUTP: State K 901 OUTP: State K 902 OUTP: State K 903 OUTP: State K 904 OUTP: State K 905 OUTP: State K 906 OUTP: State K 907 OUTP: State K 908 OUTP: State K 1001 OUTP: State K 1002 OUTP: State K 1003 OUTP: State K 1004 OUTP: State K 1005 OUTP: State K 1006 OUTP: State K 1007 OUTP: State K 1008 The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:

150 192 150 195 150 198 150 201 150 204 150 207 150 210 150 213 150 216 150 219 150 222 150 225 150 228 150 231 150 234 150 237

'Without function': 'Low': 'High':

No functions are assigned to the output relay. The output relay is not energized. The output relay is energized.

This display appears regardless of the output relay mode set.

6.1.1.2 User interface

Logic State Signals


221 005 221 004

LOC: Loc.acc.block.active LOC: Rem.acc.block.active

Communication interface 1

COMM1: Buffer overrun

221 100

IEC 61850 Communication

IEC: Control reservation Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device ("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").

221 082

Generic Object Oriented Substation Event

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 position

109 000

109 005 109 010 109 015 109 020 109 025 109 030 109 035 109 040 109 045 109 050 109 055

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-99

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 position GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 position State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 open GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 open U-100

109 060 109 065 109 070 109 075 109 100 109 105 109 110 109 115 109 120 109 125 109 130 109 135 109 140 109 145 109 150 109 155 109 160 109 165 109 170 109 175

109 001 109 006 109 011 109 016 109 021 109 026 109 031 109 036 109 041 109 046 109 051 109 056 109 061 109 066 109 071 109 076 109 101 109 106 109 111 109 116 109 121 109 126 109 131 109 136 109 141 109 146 109 151 109 156 109 161 109 166

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

109 171 GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 open 109 176 GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 open Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. 109 002 GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 007 GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 closed 109 012 GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 closed 109 017 GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 closed 109 022 GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 closed 109 027 GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 closed 109 032 GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 closed 109 037 GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 closed 109 042 GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 closed 109 047 GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 closed 109 052 GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 closed 109 057 GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 closed 109 062 GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 closed 109 067 GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 closed 109 072 GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 closed 109 077 GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 closed 109 102 GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 closed 109 107 GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 closed 109 112 GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 closed 109 117 GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 closed 109 122 GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 closed 109 127 GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 closed 109 132 GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 closed 109 137 GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 closed 109 142 GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 closed 109 147 GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 closed 109 152 GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 closed 109 157 GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 closed 109 162 GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 closed 109 167 GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 closed 109 172 GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 closed 109 177 GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 closed Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 interm.pos
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

109 003 109 008 109 013 109 018 109 023 109 028 109 033 109 038 109 043 109 048 109 053 109 058 109 063 109 068

U-101

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 interm.pos GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 interm.pos GOOSE: IED link faulty Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.

109 073 109 078 109 103 109 108 109 113 109 118 109 123 109 128 109 133 109 138 109 143 109 148 109 153 109 158 109 163 109 168 109 173 109 178 107 250

Main function

MAIN: CB1 open 3p EXT MAIN: CB2 open 3p EXT MAIN: CB3 open 3p EXT MAIN: CB4 open 3p EXT MAIN: CB1 closed 3p EXT MAIN: CB2 closed 3p EXT MAIN: CB3 closed 3p EXT MAIN: CB4 closed 3p EXT MAIN: CB1 faulty EXT MAIN: CB2 faulty EXT MAIN: Enable control MAIN: Bay interlock. act. MAIN: Subst. interl. act. MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. MAIN: CB tripped MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored MAIN: Communication error MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf MAIN: Command from HMI MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl

031 028 031 046 031 047 031 048 036 051 036 230 036 231 036 232 221 086 221 090 221 058 221 001 221 000 221 015 221 023 221 018 221 016 221 017 221 054 221 053 221 055 221 019 221 101 221 102 221 103

Over-/ Underfrequency Protection U-102

f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT

006 075

Fig.*: 3-83

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

External devices 01 to 03

DEV01: DEV01: DEV01: DEV01: DEV01: DEV01: DEV01: DEV01: DEV01: DEV01: DEV02: DEV02: DEV02: DEV02: DEV02: DEV02: DEV02: DEV02: DEV02: DEV02: DEV03: DEV03: DEV03: DEV03: DEV03: DEV03: DEV03: DEV03: DEV03: DEV03:

Open signal EXT Closed signal EXT Control state Switch. device open Switch.device closed Dev. interm./flt.pos Open command Close command Switch. device open Switch.device closed Open signal EXT Closed signal EXT Control state Switch. device open Switch.device closed Dev. interm./flt.pos Open command Close command Switch. device open Switch.device closed Open signal EXT Closed signal EXT Control state Switch. device open Switch.device closed Dev. interm./flt.pos Open command Close command Switch. device open Switch.device closed

210 030 210 031 210 018 210 036 210 037 210 038 210 028 210 029 218 000 218 001 210 080 210 081 210 068 210 086 210 087 210 088 210 078 210 079 218 002 218 003 210 130 210 131 210 118 210 136 210 137 210 138 210 128 210 129 218 004 218 005

Interlocking logic

ILOCK: Output 1 ILOCK: Output 2 ILOCK: Output 3 ILOCK: Output 4 ILOCK: Output 5 ILOCK: Output 6 ILOCK: Output 7 ILOCK: Output 8 ILOCK: Output 9 ILOCK: Output 10 ILOCK: Output 11 ILOCK: Output 12 ILOCK: Output 13 ILOCK: Output 14 ILOCK: Output 15 ILOCK: Output 16 ILOCK: Output 17 ILOCK: Output 18

250 032 250 033 250 034 250 035 250 036 250 037 250 038 250 039 250 040 250 041 250 042 250 043 250 044 250 045 250 046 250 047 250 048 250 049

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-103

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

ILOCK: Output 19 ILOCK: Output 20 ILOCK: Output 21 ILOCK: Output 22 ILOCK: Output 23 ILOCK: Output 24 ILOCK: Output 25 ILOCK: Output 26 ILOCK: Output 27 ILOCK: Output 28 ILOCK: Output 29 ILOCK: Output 30 ILOCK: Output 31 ILOCK: Output 32

250 050 250 051 250 052 250 053 250 054 250 055 250 056 250 057 250 058 250 059 250 060 250 061 250 062 250 063

U-104

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole commands

CMD_1: Command C001 CMD_1: Command C002 CMD_1: Command C003 CMD_1: Command C004 CMD_1: Command C005 CMD_1: Command C006 CMD_1: Command C007 CMD_1: Command C008 CMD_1: Command C009 CMD_1: Command C010 CMD_1: Command C011 CMD_1: Command C012 SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S001 SIG_1: Signal S002 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S002 SIG_1: Signal S003 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S003 SIG_1: Signal S004 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S004 SIG_1: Signal S005 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S005 SIG_1: Signal S006 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S006 SIG_1: Signal S007 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S007 SIG_1: Signal S008 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S008 SIG_1: Signal S009 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S009 SIG_1: Signal S010 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S010 SIG_1: Signal S011 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S011 SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT SIG_1: Logic signal S012

200 001 200 006 200 011 200 016 200 021 200 026 200 031 200 036 200 041 200 046 200 051 200 056

Single-pole signals

226 004 226 005 226 012 226 013 226 020 226 021 226 028 226 029 226 036 226 037 226 044 226 045 226 052 226 053 226 060 226 061 226 068 226 069 226 076 226 077 226 084 226 085 226 092 226 093

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-105

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

6.1.2 Measured data input

Control and Testing


003 045

MEASI: Reset Tmax USER Resetting of measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to the updated measured values.

Measured data output

MEASO: Reset output USER Resetting the measured data output function.

037 116

Over-/ Underfrequency Protection

f<>: Reset meas.val. USER

003 080

Resetting the measured event values f < > : M a x . f r e q u . f o r f > and f<>: Min. frequ. for f<.

6.2 6.2.1 Main function

Fault and Event Records Event Counters

221 087 MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. 221 091 MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap. Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a limited time period).

External devices 01 to 03

DEV01: DEV02: DEV03: DEV01: DEV02: DEV03:

Operation counter Operation counter Operation counter Dev. op. capability Dev. op. capability Dev. op. capability

210 043 210 093 210 143 210 003 210 053 210 103

U-106

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Appendix List of Bay Types (P632, P633 version -620 only)


Key
Sorting the Bay Types The bay types are sorted by the criteria listed below. These criteria are encoded in the first three characters of the bay type code (example: A11.100.R01) given in brackets after the Bay Type No. (example: Sorting is first by "Type of bay" in the order given below, then within each group by the second and third character in ascending order.

Type of bay A Feeder Bay L Longitudinal Coupler T Transversal Coupler K Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay M Busbar Measurement N Busbar Grounding X Other bay type Number of busbars - Single busbar - Double busbar - Without busbar / other configurations Equipment - Bays with switch truck or withdrawable switchgear assembly - Bays with two circuit breakers or switch disconnectors on switch trucks or withdrawable switchgear assembly - Bays with stationary switchgear units - Bays with stationary switchgear units and three-position disconnector - Other bay types

Bay Type No.:

This number indicates the value to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y (folder "Set/Conf") in order to configure the unit for the selected bay type.

Special Designations for External Devices: Mot.relay: Motor relay Shunt wd. Shunt winding

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-1

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Table "Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays" Column "Switchgear unit" This column begins with the designation for the external device (switchgear unit). The function group follows in brackets. The function group encompasses all setting options for monitoring the switchgear unit and its signals. "Open" and "Close(d)" indicate the signal message or control direction of the switchgear unit. The "Open" or "Closed" signal should be connected to the binary input U xxxx. The connection points of the binary input U xxxx are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. For the P63x in 40TE case, the positions of the binary input boards are identified as follows: A: Slot 6 B: Slot 7 C: Slot 8 The "Open" or "Close" control of the switchgear unit is effected via output relay K xxxx. The connection points of the output relay K xxxx are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. For the P63X in 40TE case, the positions of the binary output boards are identified as follows: A: Slot 6 B: Slot 7

Column "Binary Input":

Column "Output relay"

Table "Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking" Note: The interlock equations are stored at substation control level, not at unit level. Symbols used in the Boolean interlock equations: /: Negation 0: Switchgear unit "Open" I: Switchgear unit "Closed" X: Switchgear unit in intermediate position FctBl1: FctBl2: Function block 1, configuration at M A I N : F c t . a s g . f c t . b l o c k . 1 (Folder "Par/Func/Cont/") Function block 2, configuration at M A I N : F c t . a s g . f c t . b l o c k . 2 (Folder "Par/Func/Cont/")

U-App-2

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

List of P63x Bay Panel types Bay type (Identification): A Feeder Bay
2 (A11.100.R01) 3 (A11.100.R02) 4 (A11.101.R01) 5 (A11.101.R02) 6 (A11.101.R03) 523 (A11.108.R01) 7 (A11.200.R01) 8 (A11.200.R02) 9 (A11.201.R01) 10 (A11.201.R02) 11 (A11.201.R03) 12 (A11.400.R01) 13 (A11.400.R02) 14 (A11.401.R01) 15 (A11.401.R02) 16 (A11.401.R03) 17 (A11.900.R01) 504 (A11.901.R00) 541 (A13.104.R01) 19 (A13.105.R01) 20 (A13.105.R02) 21 (A13.105.R03) 557 (A13.106.R03) 26 (A13.200.R01) 28 (A13.201.R01) 29 (A13.201.R02) 31 (A13.205.R01) 32 (A13.205.R02) 33 (A13.205.R03) 34 (A13.400.R01) 36 (A13.401.R01) 37 (A13.401.R02) 39 (A13.405.R01) 40 (A13.405.R02) 41 (A13.405.R03) 503 (A13.432.R02) 507 (A13.433.R02) 43 (A15.105.R01) 221 (A15.105.R02) 44 (A15.105.R03) 87 (A23.104.R01) 88 (A23.104.R03) 101 (A23.204.R01) 102 (A23.204.R03) 115 (A23.404.R01) 116 (A23.404.R03)

L Bus Sectionalizer Bay


133 553 134 528 542 135 136 137 138 545 139 148 149 150 164 (L11.100.R01) (L11.100.R01.2) (L11.100.R02) (L11.102.R01) (L11.102.R01.2) (L11.104.R01) (L11.104.R02) (L11.104.R03) (L11.116.R01) (L11.116.R01.2) (L11.116.R03) (L11.200.R01) (L11.202.R01) (L11.202.R03) (L23.901.R02)

T Bus Coupler Bay


505 563 205 206 (Q21.100.R01) (Q21.133.R01) (Q23.101.R01) (Q23.101.R03)

M Busbar Measurement Bay


171 172 540 173 174 176 177 506 233 179 188 189 193 559 560 194 (M11.300.R00) (M11.300.R01) (M11.304.R02) (M11.900.R00) (M11.900.R01) (M13.312.R01) (M13.312.R02) (M13.902.R00) (M15.903.R01) (M15.903.R02) (M23.302.R02) (M23.312.R02) (M23.902.R02) (M23.904.R00) (M23.908.R00) (M23.912.R02)

E Busbar Grounding Bay


130 (E13.901.R01) 132 (E23.903.R02)

X Other Bay Type


1 (X99.901.R00)

Customized Bay
999 (User)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-3

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Bay Type No. 2

(A11.100.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-4

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 3

(A11.100.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-5

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 4

(A11.101.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-6

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 5

(A11.101.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-7

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 6

(A11.101.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (X0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (X0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-8

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 523

(A11.108.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-9

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 7

(A11.200.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-10

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 8

(A11.200.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-11

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 9

(A11.201.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-12

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 10

(A11.201.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-13

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 11

(A11.201.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (X0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (X0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-14

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 12

(A11.400.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-15

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 13

(A11.400.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K K K K / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

U-App-16

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 14

(A11.401.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-17

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 15

(A11.401.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K K K K / / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-18

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 16

(A11.401.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K K K K K K / A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (X0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8 X0

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (X0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-19

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 17

(A11.900.R01)

Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
X0 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-20

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 504

(A11.901.R00)

Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
/ / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-21

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 541

(A13.104.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-22

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 19

(A13.105.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-23

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 20

(A13.105.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-24

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 21

(A13.105.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-25

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 557

(A13.106.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q9 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q9

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q9

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

U-App-26

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 26

(A13.200.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-27

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 28

(A13.201.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-28

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 29

(A13.201.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-29

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 31

(A13.205.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-30

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 32

(A13.205.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-31

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 33

(A13.205.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

U-App-32

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 34

(A13.400.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02 U B05

Output relay
K A01 K A02 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-33

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 36

(A13.401.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-34

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 37

(A13.401.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K K K K / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-35

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 39

(A13.405.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-36

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 40

(A13.405.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K K K K / / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-37

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 41

(A13.405.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K K K K K K / A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

U-App-38

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 503

(A13.432.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K K K K / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-39

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 507

(A13.433.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K K K K / / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0)

U-App-40

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 43

(A15.105.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-41

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 221

(A15.105.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1

Control O/C
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1

Control O/C
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

U-App-42

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 44

(A15.105.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) (Q0=I) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=I) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-43

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 87

(A23.104.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-44

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 88

(A23.104.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q2

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-45

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 101

(A23.204.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-46

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 102

(A23.204.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q2

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-47

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 115

(A23.404.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-48

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 116

(A23.404.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 B05

Output relay
K K K K K K / A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q1 Q2

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-49

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 133

(L11.100.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-50

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 553

(L11.100.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-51

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 134

(L11.100.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X01

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X01

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

U-App-52

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 528

(L11.102.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-53

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 542

(L11.102.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-54

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 135

(L11.104.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-55

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 136

(L11.104.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K / / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X01

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X01

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-56

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 137

(L11.104.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8 X01

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (X01=0) & (Q8=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q8 X01

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (X01=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-57

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 138

(L11.116.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-58

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 545

(L11.116.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-59

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 139

(L11.116.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X01 X02

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 X01 X02

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

U-App-60

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 148

(L13.200.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-61

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 149

(L13.202.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) Q16 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-62

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 150

(L13.202.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) Q16 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q15 Q16

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) & (Q15=I) (Q0=0) & (Q16=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q15 Q16

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-63

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 164

(L23.901.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q11 (DEV01) Q21 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q11 Q21

Control O/C
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q11=0) (Q11=I) (Q21=0) (Q21=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-64

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 505

(Q21.100.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-65

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 563

(Q21.133.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-66

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 205

(Q23.101.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q10 (DEV02) Q20 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-67

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 206

(Q23.101.R03)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q0 (DEV01) Q10 (DEV02) Q20 (DEV03) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Output relay
K K K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q10 Q20

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q0 Q10 Q20

Control O/C
Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Interlock equation
/(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0) (Q0=0)

U-App-68

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 171

(M11.300.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
X0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02 U B05

Output relay
/ / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-69

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 172

(M11.300.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
X0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02 U B05

Output relay
K A01 K A02 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-70

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 540

(M11.304.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q15 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K K K K / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q15

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-71

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 173

(M11.900.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
X0 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
/ /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-72

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 174

(M11.900.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
X0 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-73

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 176

(M13.312.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q1 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-74

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 177

(M13.312.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q1 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K K K K / A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q15

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-75

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 506

(M13.902.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q1 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
/ /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-76

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 233

(M15.903.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q1 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K A01 K A02 / /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q1

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q1

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-77

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 179

(M15.903.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q1 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q1 Q8

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q8=0) (Q1=0)

U-App-78

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 188

(M23.302.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K K K K / / A01 A02 A03 A04

U B06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-79

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 189

(M23.312.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04 B05

Output relay
K K K K / / A01 A02 A03 A04

U B06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q15 Q25

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=I) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-80

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 193

(M23.902.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-81

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 559

(M23.904.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q15 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
/ /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-82

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 560

(M23.908.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q25 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
/ /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-83

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 194

(M23.912.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q15 Q25

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=I) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-84

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 130

(E13.901.R01)

Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q15 (DEV01) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U A01 U A02

Output relay
K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q15

Control O/C
Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-85

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 132

(E23.903.R02)

Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit
Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

Binary input
U U U U A01 A02 A03 A04

Output relay
K K K K A01 A02 A03 A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit
Q15 Q25

Control O/C
Close(d) Close(d)

Interlock equation
(Q15=I) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

U-App-86

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

Bay Type No. 1

(X99.901.R00)

Other bay type with other switchgear unit, without busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays


Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking


Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

U-App-87

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620


(continued)

U-App-88

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric 11/2010

www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P63x/EN AD/Ak6 Version: -611 -620

2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Am6 (AFSV.12.10310 D)
Version P631 P632 P633 P634 -308 -308 -308 -308 -407/408 -407/408 -410/411/412 -407/408 -621 -621 -621 -621

Upgrade Documentation

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

With these latest versions for the transformer differential protection devices MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 several new features and changes on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below: References Released 01.03.2006 Version P631-304-403/404-610 P632-304-403/404-610 P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610 P631-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620 P632-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620 P633-306/307/308-407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620 P634-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620 Documentation Technical Manual P63X/EN M/Aa4 (AFSV.12.09700 D) Upgrade Documentation P63X/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D)

06.06.2008

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

U-3

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

1 Version P631-308-407/408 -620-718 P632-308-407/408 -620-718 P633-308-410/411/412 -620-718 P634-308-407/408 -620-718 Release: 18.09.2008

Overview Changes Hardware Diagram Software IEC Bug fixing pertaining to the COMTRADE fault files which a client receives via the IEC 61850 interface: The correct number of binary channels is now entered in the COMTRADE configuration file (*.cfg). In previous versions when, because of the function configuration, n*16 binary information was stored then the number of binary channels was given as n*16+1. Therefore the data stored in the *.cfg and the *.dat files did not match. The automatically generated data file names are now correct with fault numbers exceeding 999. Data file names are issued according to this format: yyyymmdd_HHMMSS_xxx_rNNNN.eee With yyyy = year mm = month dd = day HH = hour MM = minute SS = second xxx = millisecond r = permanent single character NNNN = fault number eee = file extension In previous versions the dot (.) was overwritten for fault numbers exceeding 999. Stating of 'Control Modes' in the ICD file has been corrected. The IEC data model is not affected by this. LOC Bug fixing: Using the function where the set password can be made visible on the LC-display by pressing all four arrow keys simultaneously during the start up of the device is now also possible with the new local control panel (with function keys). Bug fixing: The time tags for the P S S : P S x a c t i v e spontaneous signals (according to the communications protocol per IEC-60870-5-10x) and the entry in the operating data memory did not match. Bug fixing: In offline operation mode, measured operating values for phase C were not calculated correctly with the 60 Hz nominal frequency. Bug fixing: After a warm restart the following setting was not active: V < > : t T r a n s i e n t P S x = Blocked.Because of this, the following signals were issued when undervoltage conditions were present: 042 023 V < > : t V < e l a p s . T r a n s i e n t 042 025 V<>: tV<< elapsed trans. No modifications No modifications

PSS

MAIN

V<>

-4

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

Version CBF_1 to CBF_4

Changes The release condition for the function has been dissociated from the drop-out of the internal trip signal. Therefore the sequence will now only be stopped when a loss of load/undercurrent condition has occurred or when the CB signals that its contacts are open. Bug fixing: The time tags for the C B F _ n : R e a d y spontaneous signals (according to the communications protocol per IEC-60870-5-10x) and the entry in the operating data memory did not match.

P631-308-407/408-621 P632-308-407/408-621 P633-308-410/411/412-621 P634-308-407/408-621 Release: 08.01.2009

Hardware Diagram Software Device

No modifications No modifications The devices capability to detect its hardware state has been enhanced so that future Ethernet communication and binary modules can be fitted without having to update the software. The following addresses are now visible: 002 131 D V I C E : S W v e r s i o n D H M I 002 132 D V I C E : S W v e r s i o n D H M I D M

IEC

The processing times for the control and monitoring of switchgear units between the Ethernet communication module and the main CPU have been reduced. Bug fixing: The standardized model according to WYE class (e.g. 'phsA' instead of 'adphsA') is now applied with the data model for measured values for resultant current forming ('virtual end'). The data object LN_CFG has been extended in logical nodes Dt1NgsPTOC1, Dt2NgsPTOC1, Dt3NgsPTOC1. Further logical nodes have been added: LN PloGGIO4 to the P631 LN PloGGIO4, IdcGGIO1, RtdGGIO1 to the P633 and P634 The AlmGGIO logical node has been extended by the following signals: Alm5: Alm6: Alm7: Alm8: Alm9: Al m 1 0 : 039 127 T H R M 1 : C T A e r r o r 039 187 T H R M 2 : C T A e r r o r 040 190 M E A S I : P T 1 0 0 o p e n c i r c u i t 040 191 M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t 040 192 M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p . 036 099 C T S : O p e r a t e d ( u p d a t i n g )

The 'Bl.f.' data objects are now available in all nodes: PTOC, PTOV, PTUV, PTTR, PTOF, PTUF, RBRF, PVPH. Because of this, the 'Blocking EXT' condition has been removed from the 'MODE'. The parameter at address 104 232 I E C : D e a d b a n d V L L has been renamed to I E C : D e a d b a n d V Since the corresponding measured values are not provided by the P63x, the following addresses have been deleted: 104 233 I E C : 104 235 I E C : 104 237 I E C : 104 239 I E C : 104 060 I E C : Dead band VPG Dead band P Dead band Z Dead band ASC Update cycle energy U-5

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

Version COMM1 MAIN

Changes Bug fixing with the use of the MODBUS communication protocol: Faults can now be read out. The P633 and P634 now allow disconnection of individual ends by assigning functions to binary signal inputs. Bug fixing: The measured operating values for the positive sequence currents are now calculated independently of the DTOC/IDMT protection functions. Display of the following settings has been limited in accordance with the device function. Visible only in the P632/P633 are: 021 017 021 020 021 060 021 061 MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: Sig. Sig. Sig. Sig. asg. asg. asg. asg. CB1 CB1 CB2 CB2 open closed closed open

006 001 M A I N : 006 002 M A I N : 006 003 M A I N : 006 004 M A I N :

Device selection key Device OPEN key Device CLOSE key Local/Remote key

Visible only in the P633 are: 021 062 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 3 c l o s e d 021 063 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 3 o p e n DIFF The starting condition for the saturation discriminator has been enhanced by the addition of a further minimum condition for the restraining quantity with basic filtering. Without this minimum condition, the saturation discriminator could be incorrectly triggered during the test of a characteristic using virtual test signals in the absence of a preload current. Blocking of the REF functions while the DIFF protection (functional enhancement by -611-715) has been triggered can now be enabled/disabled using setting parameters. Furthermore the R E F _ n : B l o c k i n g E X T binary signal input functions are now available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions. Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting, its state is also signaled: R E F _ n : R e a d y (= enabled AND NOT blocked). The function has been enhanced so that further ends can be included into the protection reach, e.g. in ground differential protection for autotransformers. As an option, the loss of load/undercurrent criterion can now also be used with the residual current. The external function startup may now occur either when only the loss of load/undercurrent criterion is applied or also with the CB contact position scanning criterion.

REF_1 to REF_3

REF_1

CBF_1 to CBF_4

-6

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

Version DEV02 to DEV10

Changes Bug fixing: The menu text in the reference language (English) has been corrected for the following signals: 218 002 D E V 0 2 : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n corrected to: 218 002 D E V 0 2 : O p e n c m d . r e c e i v e d 218 003 D E V 0 2 : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d corrected to: 218 003 D E V 0 2 : C l o s e c m d . r e c e i v e d etc. valid for all devices except DEV01.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

U-7

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

2 2.1 Disconnecting ends

Functional Details Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN)

With the P633 and P634, individual ends can now be disconnected when specific protections are applied or for test purposes. Only one end can be disconnected with the P633. Up to two ends can be disconnected simultaneously with the P634. If more ends are simultaneously disconnected from the measurement than is permitted, the S F M O N : U n s u f f . n o . o f e n d s alarm is issued and the device is blocked. Such a disconnection of an end will result in the setting to zero of all current scan values for the relevant phase (phase current and residual current). All functions (e.g. protection functions, limit value monitoring, operating data measurement, etc.) will continue to operate unaffected, with these values set to zero. With the differential protection function the formula to calculate the restraining current is not changed by disconnecting ends, even though only two ends may be left. Disconnecting ends may only be carried out with binary signal input functions. Starting via operating parameters (or command sent through a communications interface) is not possible. 041 019 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T 041 107 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d B E X T 041 128 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d C E X T 041 129 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d D E X T The binary signal input functions listed above must be continuously present when disconnecting ends. To enable the disconnection function, one of the following additional conditions must be met:

All three phase currents at the relevant end must be below 0.05 Inom: Disconnection of the end will be permanent as soon as (immediately after) the binary signal input function has started and this loss of load/undercurrent condition is met. Disconnection of the end will be permanently cancelled as soon as (immediately after) the binary signal input function has ended and this loss of load/undercurrent condition is met. The P63x will continue to measure any current flow in the disconnected end in order to check this loss of load/undercurrent condition, but will not display these measured values.

The disconnection function, as an alternative to the loss of load/undercurrent condition, can be enabled using another binary signal input function (041 148 MAIN: En. disc. end x EXT). As soon as both binary signal input functions are present, disconnection of the end will be effective. As long as the enabling signal is not present at the binary signal input, there is no status change, i.e. an existing disconnection of an end will remain active independently of the disconnection request. As soon as the disconnection request ends with the enable signal still present at the binary signal input then the disconnection of the end will be permanently cancelled.

-8

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

Note As shown in figure 1 both additional conditions are valid independently of each other, i.e. the following sequence is possible and requires appropriate care in the application: 1) The disconnection of an end is enabled by the additional condition: MAIN: En. disc. end x EXT. 2) This enabling condition and the disconnection request will end, for instance, with a fault in the triggering circuit. 3) As soon as the measured current value in the disconnected end drops below the 0.05 Inom threshold then the disconnection will be cancelled.

The effective disconnection of an end is signaled by a state signal. 041 149 M A I N : E n d A d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 158 M A I N : E n d B d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 159 M A I N : E n d C d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 168 M A I N : E n d D d i s c o n n e c t e d The storage of this state is fail-safe. During the devices initialization after an auxiliary power supply failure, the stored state is compared with the current state of the input functions. If there is a discrepancy (e.g. M A I N : E n d A d i s c o n n e c t e d AND NOT M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T or vice versa) the alarm ( S F M O N : D i s c . E n d x i n v a l i d ) is issued and the device remains blocked. The disconnect condition is then continuously monitored and blocking is cancelled only when the discrepancy has ended. Since the alarm has been stored in the monitoring signal memory, it must be acknowledged by the user. Setting or resetting the binary signal input is carried out by an internal function, with an operate/reset time-delay of approximately 0.5 s in order to prevent time propagation problems resulting from simultaneously switching on/off the auxiliary power supply and the signal voltage at the binary signal input.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

U-9

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

< 0.05 Inom

IA,a IB,a IC,a

&
>1

&
S 1 1

& MAIN: Disconnect End A EXT [ 041 019 ]

R 1

MAIN: End a disconnected [ 041 149 ]

< 0.05 Inom

IA,b IB,b IC,b

&
>1

&
S 1 1

& MAIN: Disconnect End B EXT [ 041 107 ]

R 1

MAIN: End b disconnected [ 041 158 ]

< 0.05 Inom

IA,c IB,c IC,c

&
>1

&
S 1 1

& MAIN: Disconnect End C EXT [ 041 128 ]

R 1

MAIN: End c disconnected [ 041 159 ]

< 0.05 Inom IA,d & IB,d


>1

IC,d &
S 1 1

& MAIN: Disconnect End D EXT [ 041 148 ] MAIN: En. disc. end x EXT [ 041 148 ]

R 1

MAIN: End d disconnected [ 041 168 ]

SFMON: Unsuff. no. of ends [ 091 010 ] P633: >1 End disconnected P634: >2 Ends disconnected

64Z6211A_EN

U-1

Disconnection logic

-10

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

2.2 Blocking ground differential protection

Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_n)

Blocking of the REF_n functions when the DIFF protection (functional enhancement of version -611-715) was triggered may now be enabled/disabled using setting parameters. Furthermore, binary signal input functions (R E F _ n : B l o c k i n g E X T ) are now available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions. Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting, the R E F _ n : R e a d y state is also indicated.

REF_1: General enable USER [ 019 050 ]

0 1
0: No 1: Yes

REF_1: Enabled [ 041 132 ]

REF_1: Enable PSx [ * ]

0 1
0: No 1: Yes PSU: PS x active [ * ]

REF_1: Bl.f.DIFF trigg. PSx [ * ]

0 1
0: No 1: Yes >1 DIFF: Meas.system 1 trigg. [ 041 124 ] DIFF: Meas.system 2 trigg. [ 041 125 ] DIFF: Meas.system 3 trigg. [ 041 126 ] REF_1: Blocking EXT [ 019 051 ] >1 REF_1: Ready [ 019 054 ]

x 1 2 3 4

PSU: PS x active 036 036 036 036 090 091 092 093

Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4

REF_1: Enable PSx 072 141 073 141 074 141 075 141

REF_1: Bl.f.DIFF trigg. PSx 080 006 081 006 082 006 083 006

64Z5300C_EN

U-1

Enabling, disabling and readiness of ground differential protection

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

U-11

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

Protection of autotransformers

Up to now the REF-function could only be applied with the high impedance principle to protect autotransformers (or, in general, electrically-connected multiple end configurations) from internal ground faults. Function group REF_1 has now been enhanced so as to provide a protection function, stabilized by a characteristic, for such protected objects. A typical example with an autotransformer is displayed in the next figure. In this case, the phase currents in ends a and b as well as the neutral-point current must be considered.

(Ix ,a)= I N,a I A,a I B,a IC,a (Ix,b)= IN,b I A,b I B,b I C,b

IN,a
U-2 Currents with an autotransformer

For such applications with REF_1, all the other ends (b, c, d dependent on the type of device) may now be selected, and end a is still permanently included in the protection function. 019 120 019 121 019 122 REF_1: Add.meas.inp. end b REF_1: Add.meas.inp. end c REF_1: Add.meas.inp. end d = Yes / No = Yes / No = Yes / No

The neutral-point current is still permanently assigned to the measuring input for end a (T14).

-12

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

A further amplitude matching factor is calculated and displayed by the device for each end added. All currents involved must be referred to a common reference value as this application entails protection of an electric node in a zero-sequence system. This common reference current value is calculated based on the settable reference power and the nominal voltage for end a. This calculation has not been changed from previous versions. The amplitude matching factors then result from the ratio of the primary transformer current values for the relevant end and the common reference current value.
Re ference current Amplitude matching factor for x = End a, b, c or d I ref = Sref ,prim 3 Vnom ,prim ,a Inom ,CT , prim ,x I ref

k amp ,x =

With Sref,prim Vnom,prim,A Inom,CT,prim,A Inom,CT,prim,B Inom,CT,prim,C Inom,CT,prim,D

= = = = = =

019 031 019 017 019 020 019 021 019 022 019 026

REF_1: Reference power Sref MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PS1 MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end a MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end b MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end c MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end d

The reference current and matching factors are displayed at the P63x. As before, the P63x checks that the reference current and matching factors remain within the permitted ranges. The permitted range for the reference current can be looked up in the S&R-103 setting and recording software. The following rule applies to the matching factors:

The largest matching factor must be 16. The value for the second largest matching factor must come to 0.5.

There are no restrictions concerning further possible matching factors. Should the P63x calculate a common reference current value or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P63x will automatically be blocked . The measured values are multiplied by the matching factors and they are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current of the device.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

U-13

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

As shown below, the differential current is formed from the sum of all phase currents involved and the neutral-point current:

I diff , N = k amp,a I N ,a + k amp,b I N,b (+...) + k amp, N I a , N

= k amp,a I A,a , I B,a , I C,a + k amp,b I A,b , I B,b , I C,b (+...) + k amp, N I a , N
The calculation of the restraining current depends on the set operating mode. If the operating mode is set to 'Low imped. / sum(IP)', the restraining current is calculated from the sum of all involved ends:

I R , N = k amp,a I N,a + k amp,b I N,b (+...)

= k amp,a I A,a , I B,a , I C,a + k amp,b I A,b , I B,b , I C,b (+...)


If the operating mode is set to 'Low imped. / IP,max', the formula to calculate the restraining current remains unchanged from the application for a single end. But now the highest phase current is calculated from the amplitude-matched sum of the currents on the relevant phase of all ends involved.
IR ,N = 1 max I A , I B , I C + kamp ,N I a ,N 2

( unchanged )

with I x = k amp,a I x ,a + k amp,b I x ,b ( +....) ,

for x = A, B or C

The value pairs (Id,N/IR,N) calculated with the above formula are then compared with the already identified pick-up characteristics of the ground differential protection function.

-14

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

2.3 Current flow monitoring

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)

The existing line-associated current flow monitoring function has been enhanced by a residual current monitoring function which can be enabled/disabled. For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or the value derived from the three phase currents may be used. But this choice is only possible when a measuring input for the residual current is available. There is no measuring input for the residual current available with the P631 or for end d on the P634. In these cases, the internally derived value of the residual current is always used, regardless of the setting. As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing, the current flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (C B F _ n : C u r r e n t f l o w N ) is issued. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled, no monitoring is carried out and the C B F _ n : C u r r e n t f l o w N = No signal is issued continuously.

CBF_1: I< [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC CBF_1: Current flow A [ 038 230 ] CBF_1: Current flow B [ 038 231 ] CBF_1: Current flow C [ 038 232 ] >1 CBF_1: Current flow Phx [ 038 233 ]

CBF_ 1: Evaluation IN [ 022 184 ] 0 1 2 0: Without 1: Calculated 2: Measured

C1 c2 + + + 1 2 1 2 CBF_ 1: IN< [ 022 180 ] >1 CBF_1: Current flow N [ 038 235 ] CBF_1: IN

IN

64Z1103C_EN

U-3

Current flow monitoring

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

U-15

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

Startup

The external startup of the circuit breaker failure function (CBF_n) has been modified. The CBF function is always started when there is current flowing during a startup. But, if no current flow is apparent, the CBF function is only started when the external startup has been selected. For this, the selection table for the C B F _ n : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x . setting parameter has been extended and now includes the C B F _ n : S t a r t 3 p E X T signal. The startup of the circuit breaker failure function by the internal Trip command remains unchanged. As of version 620, the release condition for the CBF function has been dissociated from the startup condition (internal trip command or external startup). Once started, the CBF function will only drop out when a successful opening has been detected from the current flow monitoring or, in some cases, from the CB contact position signal.

-16

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

(continued)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

CBF_1: Fct. assignm. CBAux. [ 022 159 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal n

m out of n

Selected signals CBF_1: CB pos. implausible [ 038 210 ] CBF_1: I< [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC & & &
S 1 R 1 1
>1

& &

CBF: Current flow N [ 038 235 ] MAIN: CB1 open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB1 closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] CBF_1: Start with man. trip [ 022 154 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes CBF_ 1: Fct. assign. starting [ 022 202 ] Gen.trip signal 1 Gen.trip signal 2 Gen.trip signal 3 Gen.trip signal 4 MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 [ 036 005 ] MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 [ 036 023 ] MAIN: Gen. trip signal 3 [ 036 108 ] MAIN: Gen. trip signal 4 [ 036 109 ] MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked [ 021 013 ] MAIN: Manual trip signal [ 034 017 ] INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx [ xxx yyy ] U x01 U x02 U x03 U xnn CBF_1: Start enable EXT [ 038 209 ] CBF_1: Start 3p EXT [ 038 205 ] Address 038 209 & & & & & & &
>1 >1

>1

&

S 1 R 1

CBF_ 1: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ]

&

&

64Z1104D_EN

U-4

Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

U-17

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric 11/2010

www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P63x/EN AD/Am6 Version: -621

2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/An6
(AFSV.12.10620 D) Version P631 P632 P633 P634 P631 P632 P633 P634 -308 -308 -308 -308 -308 -308 -308 -308 -407/408 -407/408 -410/411/412 -407/408 -407/408 -407/408 -410/411/412 -407/408 -621 -621 -621 -621 -622 -622 -622 -622

Upgrade Documentation

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622

In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Devices MiCOM P63x, several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below: References Released 01.03.2006 Version P631-304-403/404-610 P632-304-403/404-610 P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610 P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P632-306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P633-306/307/308 -407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620 P634-306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P631-308-407/408-621 P632-308-407/408-621 P633-308-410/411/412-621 P634-308-407/408-621 Documentation Technical Manual P63x/EN M/Ca4 (AFSV.12.09700 D) Upgrade Documentation P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D)

06.06.2008

08.01.2009

Upgrade Documentation P63x/EN AD/Am6 (AFSV.12.10310 D)

P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622


(continued)

1 Version P631-308-407/408-621-720 P632-308-407/408-621-720 P633-308-410/411/412-621 -720 P634-308-407/408-621-720 Release: 29.07.2009

Overview Changes Hardware Diagram No change No change

Software DIFF Bug fixing: It could happen that triggering of the saturation discriminator by an external fault was not reset fast enough when an additional fault had occurred within the same protection zone. Bug fixing: The associated signal C B F _ x : C u r r e n t f l o w y (y=A, B, C) would sometimes jitter during an open command. Triggering of the circuit breaker failure protection function would sometimes be delayed. Further delays could sometimes occur with the signals for CBF_1 and CBF_2.

CBF_x

P631-308-407/408-622 P632-308-407/408-622 P633-308-410/411/412-622 P634-308-407/408-622 Release: 09.02.2011

Hardware Diagram Software PC

No change No change

The following menu point has been removed: P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183) Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program continues to be guaranteed. The data point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) may now be used to select between the 103 protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the VDEW implementation. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled. The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices. The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS protocol. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.

COMM1

COMM1

P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622


(continued)

Version COMM1, COMM2

Changes The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161) and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default. Notes: These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel (HMI). The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding this will be truncated. The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled. Bug fixing: The implementation of the IEC 61850 signals RBRFn and the IEC 61850 modeling of IN in the Logical Nodes MMXU and MSQ has been modified so that it matches other MiCOM Px3x protection devices. Bug fixing: Settings for daylight saving time were reset after a warm restart. The designation texts of the following data points have been changed, but their functionality remains unchanged. The left side shows the old designation and the right side shows the new designation. REF_3: Restrain.curr. REF_3 REF_3: Restrain.curr. REF_3 The English designation texts of the following data points have been changed, but their functionality remains unchanged. The old designation is shown on the left and the new designation on the right hand side. LED: Fct.assig. H12 rot LED: Fct.assig. H12 red SFMON: Unsuff. no. of ends SFMON:Unsuff. No. of ends P634 only: CBF_4: CB pos. implausibel CBF_4: CB pos. implausible P631, P632, P633, P634: MAIN: Disconnect End A EXT MAIN: Disconnect End a EXT P632, P633, P634 only: MAIN: Disconnect End B EXT MAIN: Disconnect End b EXT P633, P634 only: MAIN: Disconnect End C EXT MAIN: Disconnect End c EXT P634 only: MAIN: Disconnect End D EXT MAIN: Disconnect End d EXT similar for MAIN: E n d x d i s c o n n e c t e d (old: x=A,B,C,D; new: x=a,b,c,d)

IEC

MAIN LED, MAIN, SFMON, REF_3, CBF_4

P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622

Customer Care Centre


http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric 06/2011

www.schneider-electric.com

Publication: P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622

2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Aq6
(AFSV.12.10630 D) Version P631 P632 P633 P634 P631 P632 P633 P634 -308 -308 -308 -308 -308 -308 -308 -308 -407/408 -407/408 -410/411/412 -407/408 -407/408 -407/408 -410/411/412 -407/408 -621 -621 -621 -621 -630 -630 -630 -630

Upgrade Documentation

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630

In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Devices MiCOM P63x, several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below: References Released 01.03.2006 Version P631-304-403/404-610 P632-304-403/404-610 P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610 P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P632 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P633 -306/307/308 -407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620 P634 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P631-308-407/408-621 P632-308-407/408-621 P633-308-410/411/412-621 P634-308-407/408-621 Documentation Technical Manual P63x/EN M/Ca4 (AFSV.12.09701 D) Upgrade Documentation P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D)

06.06.2008

08.01.2009

Upgrade Documentation P63x/EN AD/Am6 (AFSV.12.10310 D)

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

1 Version P631-308-407/408-621-720 P632-308-407/408-621-720 P633-308-410/411/412-621 -720 P634-308-407/408-621-720 Release: 29.07.2009

Overview Changes Hardware Diagram No change No change

Software DIFF Bug fixing: It could happen that triggering of the saturation discriminator by an external fault was not reset fast enough when an additional fault had occurred within the same protection zone. Bug fixing: The associated signal C B F _ x : C u r r e n t f l o w y (y=A, B, C) would sometimes jitter during an open command. Triggering of the circuit breaker failure protection function would sometimes be delayed. Further delays could sometimes occur with the signals of CBF_1 and CBF_2.

CBF_x

P631-308-407/408-630 P632-308-407/408-630 P633-308-410/411/412-630 P634-308-407/408-630 Release: 09.02.2011

Hardware Diagram Software DVICE

No change No change

The new data point (008 233) D V I C E : S W v e r s . C h i n . D H M I D M is a purely internal version number (for the order option "Chinese display"). Bug fixing: Display problems with the Fault Panel are resolved.

IEC GOOSE

IEC

PC

Phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communications protocol has been implemented. See section "Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)" for a detailed description of the numerous function enhancements carried out. Bug fixing: The implementation of the IEC 61850 signals RBRFn and the IEC 61850 modeling of IN in the Logical Nodes MMXU and MSQ has been modified so that it matches other MiCOM Px3x protection devices. The following menu point has been removed: P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183) Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program continues to be guaranteed. The data point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) may now be used to select between the 103 protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the VDEW implementation. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.

COMM1

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Version COMM1

Changes The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices. The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS protocol. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled. Communications protocol IEC 60870-5-103: When checking during test operations it is now possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV) from the control part (previously only possible from the protection part). These new addresses were added: Oper/CtrlTest/COMM1 (221 105) C O M M 1 : S e l . p o s . d e v . t e s t (221 106) C O M M 1 : T e s t p o s i t i o n d e v . Not assigned DEV01 to DEV03 don't execute execute open execute close execute intermed.

COMM1 (P632 & P633 only)

COMM1, COMM2

MAIN

The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161) and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default. Notes: These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel (HMI). The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding this will be truncated. The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled. New logic state signal: Clock synchronization: The parameter: M A I N : T i m e s y n c h r o n i z e d (009 109) shows whether an external clock synchronization had been carried out. This signal is reset after 10 minutes.

Bug fixing: Settings for daylight saving time were reset after a warm restart. V/f The setting range for V / f : t a t V / f = 1 . 0 5 P S x has been extended: Previously: 1.0 s to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s, Now: 1.0 s to 6000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s. Similarly, the setting range for V / f : R e s e t t i m e P S x has been extended: Previously: 0 s to 10000 s in steps of 1 s, Now: 0 s to 60000 s in steps of 1 s.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Version DEVxx

Changes Device identifiers can now be edited. In the "Designat. ext. dev." parameters the 'Device Name User' setting should be selected. Then the text for the device's name, entered by the user at each of the "DEV-Name User" parameters, will be used as the devices designation. The maximum number of 4 characters was not changed from the previous permanent default setting. Parameters (DEV01/DEV02/DEV03): D E V x x : D E V - N a m e U s e r (218 101, 218 102, 218 103) LED, MAIN, SFMON, CTS, REF_3, CBF_4 The designation text of the following data point has been changed, but the functionality remains unchanged. The left side shows the old designation and the right side shows the new designation. CTS: Reset latching EXT CTS: Reset latch. EXT The designation texts of the following data points have been changed. The old designation is shown on the left and the new designation on the right hand side. LED: Fct.assig. H12 rot LED: Fct.assig. H12 red SFMON: Unsuff. no. of ends SFMON: Unsuff. No. of ends P634 only: CBF_4: CB pos. implausibel CBF_4: CB pos. implausible P631, P632, P633, P634: MAIN: Disconnect End A EXT MAIN: Disconnect End a EXT P632, P633, P634 only: MAIN: Disconnect End B EXT MAIN: Disconnect End b EXT P633, P634 only: MAIN: Disconnect End C EXT MAIN: Disconnect End c EXT P634 only: MAIN: Disconnect End D EXT MAIN: Disconnect End d EXT similar for MAIN: E n d x d i s c o n n e c t e d (old: x=A,B,C,D; new: x=a,b,c,d)

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Version ILOCK (P632 & P633 only)

Changes As the interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the newly implemented phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communication protocol (see above), it is now a requirement that these interlock conditions are cyclically checked and not, as before, only with the request for a switching operation. Therefore this new parameter has been introduced: (221 104) I L O C K : C y c l e t i n t e r l . c h e c k The cycle time (range from 100 ms to 10 s) is set here, after which a check of the interlock conditions is carried out. As additional processor capacity must be provided for each of these checks it must be ensured that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting value. On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated without any notable delays, but on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so short that the P63x system will be under too much strain. As the P63x CPU load is dependent on the total number of function groups having been configured it is not possible to suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

2 2.1

Functional Details Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

As a further option the device is provided with the interface protocol according to the Ethernet based communication standard IEC 61850. As of firmware version P63x -630 the implementation and configuration of the IEC communication interface are now different from previous design versions. IEC 61850 IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability for two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation. This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands. For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal images. The following documentation providing the description of the IEC 61850 data model used with this unit is available:

An XML-based IDC file in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available from the unit, that are to be imported into the configuration tool "IED Configurator or into a system configurator. A PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:

PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available services. MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available object types. ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with the device data model as per IEC 61850.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Ethernet Module The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection of which of the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter [IC ]: M ed ia . Note: Setting parameters from the IEC function group and identified by "[IC ]:..." provide information only. They are set with the "IED Configurator", but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program.

There are two ordering variants available for the fiber-optic interface: the ST connector and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant ST connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is pending). The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote access with the MiCOM S1 operating program (function group COMM2). Notes: The unit may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an alternative to function group COMM1.

Configuration and enabling The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C . This parameter is visible only if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After having included the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C in the configuration the parameter I E C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R and the parameters for internal clock tracking are visible and freely configurable. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting IEC: General enable USER. The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related function groups GOOSE and GSSE are not automatically active in the unit. The unit features two memory "banks" one of which includes the active setting parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the IED Configurator and the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the unit by downloading a .MCL file. The inactive communication parameters are activated by executing the command I E C : S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k . This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

U-1

Configuration according to IEC 61850-6

10

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!


IED Processor module Operating program Device parameters
Parameter download

Control PC

Parameter switch

IED Configurator

Ethernet module
Parameter upload

IEC 61850 parameter Bank 1

IEC 61850 parameter Bank 2

Bank switching to enable the device parameters

New approach to IED parameter management


19Z7002A_EN

U-2

Saving configuration parameters

Client Log-on Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as defined in the 'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the devices. A 'server' is always that unit which provides information to other units. A client may log on to this server in order to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In its function as server the unit can supply up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

11

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Clock Synchronization With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard for Ethernet. Here the unit functions as an SNTP client. For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all units in the network, and in the second operating mode the unit requests a unit-specific time signal during a settable cycle. Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably performed by the first server. The second server is reverted to only if no signal is received from the first server. When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN function then, by selecting "COMM1/IEC", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied. Generating datasets, reporting The specific project related feature of the units communications behavior is determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority transmission methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as to be transmitted as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects. The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset are determined by the application; merely the maximum size of a dataset to be transmitted by GOOSE (see next section) is limited to 1500 bytes. Data objects provided by the unit are available for selection with a structure as specified by IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the units state; the other attributes are not set. Any number of datasets may be created with the IED Configurator. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The knowledge of dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received signals. Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of all data objects included. Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see following section) datasets are used mainly for reporting. The unit provides up to sixteen unbuffered reports and eight buffered reports independent of the number of clients logged-on. Management is arranged into sixteen Unbuffered Report Control Blocks (urcbA to urcbP) and eight Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA to brcbH). Whereas with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost during a communications failure, the buffered report control blocks support a buffered transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A pre-defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine which data object will be transmitted with the relevant report. Assigning datasets is not limited; the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in GOOSEs. The unit can serve up to sixteen clients. Each client can log-on to any number of available reports, but one report is always allocated exclusively to only one client. The client is then able to activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his requirements. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into account when datasets are assigned to the reports. Reports are not received by the unit.

12

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Transmitting modeled signals not provided by the IEC 61850 data model In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the unit to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting I E C : S i g G G I O 1 s e l e c t i o n . The data object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the m out of n selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data objects. Single commands Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command) are configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the unit can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the unit. But only one command at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control with normal security is provided for single commands. Control and monitoring of switchgear units Configuration of control of switchgear devices for the IEC 61850 is only possible with the IED Configurator. Control of switchgear devices can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the unit. Only one control command is executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of such a command are rejected. The following operating modes [ I C ] : c t l M o d e l are available to control external devices by clients and they can be individually set for each switchgear device:

Status only Direct control with enhanced security SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security

When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are rejected. If after a selection no control command is issued by the client the unit resets this selection after a settable timeout period [IC ]: sbo T ime ou t (default: 2 minutes) has elapsed. If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of secondary units among themselves is setup with GOOSE. For further details see description of function group GOOSE. The switchgear devices contact positions are signaled to the clients with the reports. Fault transmission Including fault transmission for IEC 61850 in the configuration is possible only with the IED Configurator. Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer". COMTRADE fault files in the unit are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files. Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

13

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

High priority transmission of information Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at Ethernet level. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received by all participants in the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or client function. They are deployed in instances where high-speed transmission of information is wanted between two or more devices. Applications, for example, are reverse interlocking, transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock. The IEC 61850 standard provides two modes for high priority transmission of information: the GSSE and the GOOSE. The GSSE (also named UCA2-GOOSE) is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. The GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values, two-pole contact position signals or analog measured values. The unit supports receipt and evaluation of GOOSE including binary information and two-pole contact position signals from external devices. Communication with the MiCOM S1 operating program via the Ethernet interface Direct access by the MiCOM S1 operating program via the Ethernet interface on the device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is supported only by the associated MiCOM S1 operating program (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication. Available are all the familiar functions offered by the MiCOM S1 operating program such as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.

14

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Function group IEC presents the following parameters, measured values and signals: Parameters listed in italic letters provide information only. They are set with the IEC 61850 configuration tool "IED Configurator", but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Configuration parameters in the operating program IEC: Function group IEC Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. IEC: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
056 059

104 000

104 043 IEC: S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set communication parameters as the active communication settings.

IEC: Active Config. Name


Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.

104 045

IEC: Active Config. Vers.


Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.

104 046

IEC: Inact. Config. Name


Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.

104 047

IEC: Inact. Config. Vers.


Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.

104 048

IEC: IED name

104 057

Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the Logical Device Name. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

15

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

IEC: IP address

104 001

IP address of the unit set for the server function in the system. Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was used to set the IP address. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: IP Address.

IEC: Subnet mask

104 005

The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network. Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was used to set the sub-network. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.

IEC: Gateway address

104 011

This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for communication links to clients outside of the local network. Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was used to set the network gateway. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.

IEC: SNTP server 1 IP


IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.

104 202

IEC: SNTP server 2 IP

104 202

IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization 104 064 IEC: SigGGIO1 selection Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). 104 206 IEC: Diff. local time Time difference between UTC and local time at the units substation.
104 207 IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time. 104 219 IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is wanted. 104 220 IEC: Dayl.sav.time start 104 221 IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d 104 222 IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m These three parameters define the date for switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. By combining the three parameters I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t (values "first", "second", "third", "fourth", "last"), I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d (seven weekdays) and I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . m (month) a setting, for example, such as "on the last Sunday in March" can be carried out. 104 223 IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to 3:00 AM the parameter I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is set to 120 (minutes).

16

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

104 225 IEC: Dayl.sav.time end 104 226 IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d 104 227 IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m 104 228 IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+ These parameters define the date and time of day for the clock changeover from daylight saving time to standard time. Settings are made similar to the changeover to daylight saving time.

Parameter, unit identification DVICE: MAC address module A MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is set during manufacture and can only be read. Function parameters associated with IEC 61850, general function COUNT: Iec61850 pulsQty

104 061

221 096

Setting the scaling factor for the count values transmission via IEC 61850. According to the standard the resulting value is calculated as: Value transmitted = updated value * pulsQty. Operation, cyclic values, logic state signals IEC: Comm. link faulty
105 180

Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is missing or there is an implausible parameter setting. IEC: Control reservation Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device ("select" for control by control mode "select before operate"). Configuration parameters in the IED Configurator
221 082

IED Details: SCL File ID


Identification of the .mcl configuration file. The preset value may be changed on demand by, for example, entering a bay name.

IED Details: SCL File Version


Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration. The preset value may be changed on demand by, for example, identifying the revision states during engineering. Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the Logical Device Name. Further specific values listed in the column "Template Details" only provide information. They are preset and cannot be modified.

IED Details: Name

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

17

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Communications: Connected Sub-Network


Optional name available to identify the Ethernet.

Communications: Access Point


Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified.

Communications: IP Address
Explicitly assigned IP address of the unit for the server function in the system.

Communications: SubNet Mask


The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.

Communications: Gateway Address


This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway for communication links to clients outside of the local network.

Communications: Media
Network hardware provided as fiber optics or twisted pair copper wires.

Communications: TCP Keepalive


Communication monitoring at TCP level; preset.

Communications: Database Lock Timeout


Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced; preset.

SNTP: Poll Rate (seconds)


Polling interval for clock synchronization; preset.

SNTP: Accepted Stratum level


Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset, cannot be modified.

SNTP: IP Address
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.

SNTP: virtual key "Use Anycast"


Appointing any server in the local network to provide clock synchronization. Further specific values listed in the column "External server parameters" may be accepted when imported from an XML configuration file.

Dataset Definitions: Name


Explicitly assigned name for the dataset.

Dataset Definitions: Location


Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory.

Dataset Definitions: Contents


Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset

Dataset Definitions: Display GOOSE Capacity


Checking the length of a dataset for less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages. The display is irrelevant when the dataset is only used in reports.

18

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Report Control Blocks: Report Type


Report type Unbuffered

updating saving

Buffered

Report Control Blocks: Report ID


Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.

Report Control Blocks: Dataset Reference


Name of the dataset assigned to the report.

Report Control Blocks: Configuration Revision


Revision status of the configuration.

Controls: ctlModel

To control external devices the following operating modes can be set: Status only manually operated switching device Direct control with enhanced security direct command issue with extended monitoring of command effecting SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security switching device selection procedure with extended monitoring of command effecting

Controls: sboTimeout
Return time period after selection without having issued a command.

Controls: Uniqueness of Control: Multicast MAC Address


Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.

Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Application ID (hex)


ID-number of the GOOSE.

Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Source Path


Information data attribute in the transmitting device.

Controls, Uniqueness of Control: GOOSE Identifier


ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.

Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Dataset Reference


Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.

Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Configuration Revision


Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.

Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Data Obj Index


Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

19

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Default Input Value


Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed: False Default: not set

True Last Known Value Double Point: Intermediate (00) Double Point: Off (01) Double Point: On (10) Double Point: Bad state (11)

Default: set Default: retain last value received Default: switching device in intermediate position Default: switching device open Default: switching device closed Default: switching device in intermediate position

Measurements: Unit multiplier


Multiplication factor; not supported.

Measurements: Scaled measurement range Min


Lower measuring range limit value; not supported.

Measurements: Scaled measurement range Max


Upper measuring range limit value; not supported.

Measurements: Deadband
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value must exceed the smallest display value.

Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.measCyc: Value


Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two dead band evaluations.

Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.enCyc: Value


Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.

Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.comtrade: Value


Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary files.

Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.distExtr: Value


Cancelling fault transmission or including it in the configuration. Further specific values listed in the column "Data type only provide information. They are preset and cannot be modified.

20

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

2.2

Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)

For high priority exchange of information between individual units (IEDs) in a local network, the unit provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of information for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals. GOOSE messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE messages therefore remain in the local network to which the unit is connected. Configuration and enabling Function group GOOSE can be configured using the parameter G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is visible only if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. Once the GOOSE is configured, all parameters associated to this function group are then visible and settable. Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GOOSE: General enable USER.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

21

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Device A
IEC 61850 Mapping S1 Studio System/GosGGIO2

Device B
S1 Studio GOOSE: Input 1 ... 32

GOOSE: Output 1 ... 32

System/GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 ... 32

IED Configurator System/LLN0/Datasetx

IED Configurator

System/GosGGIO1

Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal

IED Configurator System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08

MCL

IED Configurator

System/DevGosGGIO3

Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal

Fixed assignment

S1 Studio

Ext.Dev 1 32
19Z7003A_EN

U-3

GOOSE configuration

22

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Sending GOOSE The unit can send up to eight different GOOSE messages that are managed in eight GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on the respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED Configurator to check this limit. When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end. In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the unit to be transmitted via GOOSE, as it is also possible with reporting. Selection of binary state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The data object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the GOOSE outputs. The indexes GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data objects. When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter [ I C ] : M i n i m u m C y c l e T i m e . The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter [ I C ] : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [IC ]: M a ximu m C yc le Ti me, then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle time. In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics such as [IC]: Multicas t MAC Ad dress , [IC]: Application ID (hex), [IC ]: VL AN Id en ti fi er (h e x) , [IC ]: VL AN Pr iori ty and [IC ]: GO O SE Ide n ti fi er must be entered in the IED Configurator settings. Further characteristics are [IC ]: Da tase t R e fer ence and [IC ]: Co n fi gur ati on R e vis io n . Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

23

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Receiving GOOSE With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals as well as 32 two-pole contact position signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting [IC]: Multicas t MAC Ad dress , [IC]: Application ID (hex), [IC]: Source Path, [IC]: GOOSE Id entifie r and [ I C ] : D a ta S e t R e fer e n c e . With the further setting of [IC ]: Da ta O bj Inde x / T ype , which corresponds to the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending unit, the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The identification features "VLAN identifier" and [ I C ] : C o n f i g u r a t i o n R e v i s i o n that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated. These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from unit or project planning documentation of the sending unit or from a configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will support the import of .IID, .SCD and .MCL files when the "browse function" (virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of parameters from an existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and very reliable data input. Should the data type of the selected data object provide quality information then this can be evaluated. When activating [I C ] : Q u a l i t y O b j I n d e x, the distance of the quality descriptor to the data object (if not preset) must be given as well as the quality criterion, which is to be tested. A signal is rejected when one of the bits ([IC ]: In va lid i ty Q ua li ty b i ts , see displayed bar with bit state) is received as a set bit. These parameters are usually described in a configuration file and are accepted from there during an import action. Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without this GOOSE having been received again (e.g. because of a fault in communications), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective default values [ I C ] : D e f a u l t I n p u t V a l u e . Which of the possible state values will set the desired security grade depends on the relevant application. The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 32) is based on the selection table of the binary inputs, identical to that of the opto-coupler inputs. Contact position signals received from external devices (LN: DevGosGGIO3) are listed in the selection table for interlocking equations of the function group ILOCK, which are available to design a decentralized substation interlock. The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input to an external data point. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are deleted.

24

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Uniqueness of control within a system If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of secondary units among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The unit sets the status information Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control command. This information - stored in a dataset is distributed in the system by GOOSE and is therefore available to all other units as an interlocking condition. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after termination of the command sequence. The unit is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further units. With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured. During a signaling receipt phase command execution will be rejected.

U-4

Uniqueness of Control

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

25

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

The function group GOOSE presents the following parameters, measured values and signals: Configuration parameters in the operating program GOOSE: Function group GOOSE
056 068

Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k .
106 001 GOOSE: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE. 106 011 GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 106 013 GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 106 015 GOOSE: Output 3 fct.assig. 106 017 GOOSE: Output 4 fct.assig. 106 019 GOOSE: Output 5 fct.assig. 106 021 GOOSE: Output 6 fct.assig. 106 023 GOOSE: Output 7 fct.assig. 106 025 GOOSE: Output 8 fct.assig. 106 027 GOOSE: Output 9 fct.assig. 106 029 GOOSE: Output 10 fct.assig. 106 031 GOOSE: Output 11 fct.assig. 106 033 GOOSE: Output 12 fct.assig. 106 035 GOOSE: Output 13 fct.assig. 106 037 GOOSE: Output 14 fct.assig. 106 039 GOOSE: Output 15 fct.assig. 106 041 GOOSE: Output 16 fct.assig. 106 043 GOOSE: Output 17 fct.assig. 106 045 GOOSE: Output 18 fct.assig. 106 047 GOOSE: Output 19 fct.assig. 106 049 GOOSE: Output 20 fct.assig. 106 051 GOOSE: Output 21 fct.assig. 106 053 GOOSE: Output 22 fct.assig. 106 055 GOOSE: Output 23 fct.assig. 106 057 GOOSE: Output 24 fct.assig. 106 059 GOOSE: Output 25 fct.assig. 106 061 GOOSE: Output 26 fct.assig. 106 063 GOOSE: Output 27 fct.assig. 106 065 GOOSE: Output 28 fct.assig. 106 067 GOOSE: Output 29 fct.assig. 106 069 GOOSE: Output 30 fct.assig. 106 071 GOOSE: Output 31 fct.assig. 106 073 GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig. Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE outputs. Signals configured here can be included as GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 in the datasets.

26

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

107 006 GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 016 GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 107 026 GOOSE: Input 3 fct.assig. 107 036 GOOSE: Input 4 fct.assig. 107 046 GOOSE: Input 5 fct.assig. 107 056 GOOSE: Input 6 fct.assig. 107 066 GOOSE: Input 7 fct.assig. 107 076 GOOSE: Input 8 fct.assig. 107 086 GOOSE: Input 9 fct.assig. 107 096 GOOSE: Input 10 fct.assig. 107 106 GOOSE: Input 11 fct.assig. 107 116 GOOSE: Input 12 fct.assig. 107 126 GOOSE: Input 13 fct.assig. 107 136 GOOSE: Input 14 fct.assig. 107 146 GOOSE: Input 15 fct.assig. 107 156 GOOSE: Input 16 fct.assig. 107 157 GOOSE: Input 17 fct.assig. 107 158 GOOSE: Input 18 fct.assig. 107 159 GOOSE: Input 19 fct.assig. 107 160 GOOSE: Input 20 fct.assig. 107 161 GOOSE: Input 21 fct.assig. 107 162 GOOSE: Input 22 fct.assig. 107 163 GOOSE: Input 23 fct.assig. 107 164 GOOSE: Input 24 fct.assig. 107 165 GOOSE: Input 25 fct.assig. 107 166 GOOSE: Input 26 fct.assig. 107 167 GOOSE: Input 27 fct.assig. 107 168 GOOSE: Input 28 fct.assig. 107 169 GOOSE: Input 29 fct.assig. 107 170 GOOSE: Input 30 fct.assig. 107 171 GOOSE: Input 31 fct.assig. 107 172 GOOSE: Input 32 fct.assig. Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE inputs (GosGGIO1\Pos1.stVal to GosGGIO1\Pos32.stVal) to a binary logical state signal on the unit so that they can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. Signals configured here contain the received and pre-processed state of data attributes configured for GOOSE receipt.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

27

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Physical state signals

GOOSE: Output 1 state GOOSE: Output 2 state GOOSE: Output 3 state GOOSE: Output 4 state GOOSE: Output 5 state GOOSE: Output 6 state GOOSE: Output 7 state GOOSE: Output 8 state GOOSE: Output 9 state GOOSE: Output 10 state GOOSE: Output 11 state GOOSE: Output 12 state GOOSE: Output 13 state GOOSE: Output 14 state GOOSE: Output 15 state GOOSE: Output 16 state GOOSE: Output 17 state GOOSE: Output 18 state GOOSE: Output 19 state GOOSE: Output 20 state GOOSE: Output 21 state GOOSE: Output 22 state GOOSE: Output 23 state GOOSE: Output 24 state GOOSE: Output 25 state GOOSE: Output 26 state GOOSE: Output 27 state GOOSE: Output 28 state GOOSE: Output 29 state GOOSE: Output 30 state GOOSE: Output 31 state GOOSE: Output 32 state Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.

106 010 106 012 106 014 106 016 106 018 106 020 106 022 106 024 106 026 106 028 106 030 106 032 106 034 106 036 106 038 106 040 106 042 106 044 106 046 106 048 106 050 106 052 106 054 106 056 106 058 106 060 106 062 106 064 106 066 106 068 106 070 106 072

28

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

GOOSE: Input 1 state GOOSE: Input 2 state GOOSE: Input 3 state GOOSE: Input 4 state GOOSE: Input 5 state GOOSE: Input 6 state GOOSE: Input 7 state GOOSE: Input 8 state GOOSE: Input 9 state GOOSE: Input 10 state GOOSE: Input 11 state GOOSE: Input 12 state GOOSE: Input 13 state GOOSE: Input 14 state GOOSE: Input 15 state GOOSE: Input 16 state GOOSE: Input 17 state GOOSE: Input 18 state GOOSE: Input 19 state GOOSE: Input 20 state GOOSE: Input 21 state GOOSE: Input 22 state GOOSE: Input 23 state GOOSE: Input 24 state GOOSE: Input 25 state GOOSE: Input 26 state GOOSE: Input 27 state GOOSE: Input 28 state GOOSE: Input 29 state GOOSE: Input 30 state GOOSE: Input 31 state GOOSE: Input 32 state Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.

106 200 106 201 106 202 106 203 106 204 106 205 106 206 106 207 106 208 106 209 106 210 106 211 106 212 106 213 106 214 106 215 106 216 106 217 106 218 106 219 106 220 106 221 106 222 106 223 106 224 106 225 106 226 106 227 106 228 106 229 106 230 106 231

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

29

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Logic state signals

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. (Addresses 109 000,109 005109 175 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.)

109 000

109 001 GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.

(Addresses 109 001,109 006109 176 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.) 109 002 GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. (Addresses 109 002,109 007109 177 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.) GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
109 003

(Addresses 109 003,109 008109 178 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.) 107 180 GOOSE: IED01 link faulty Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured signal is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the reception of the next state signal. (Addresses 107 180107 215 for IED01 to IED32.) 107 216 GOOSE: ExtDev01 link faulty Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured external device is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the reception of the next state signal. (Addresses 107 216107 247 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.)
107 250 GOOSE: IED link faulty Display that appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the reception of the next state signal.

30

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

Configuration parameters in the IED Configurator

GOOSE Publishing: Multicast MAC Address


Virtual MAC address that the sending unit provides as the destination; preset.

GOOSE Publishing: Application ID (hex)


Explicitly assigned ID number of the GOOSE.

GOOSE Publishing: VLAN Identifier (hex)


ID number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.

GOOSE Publishing: VLAN Priority


Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.

GOOSE Publishing: Minimum Cycle Time


First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.

GOOSE Publishing: Maximum Cycle Time


Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.

GOOSE Publishing: Increment


Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.

GOOSE Publishing: GOOSE Identifier


GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.

GOOSE Publishing: Dataset Reference


Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.

GOOSE Publishing: Configuration Revision


Revision status of the configuration.

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

31

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

GOOSE Subscribing: Multicast MAC Address


Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.

GOOSE Subscribing: Application ID (hex)


ID-number of the GOOSE.

GOOSE Subscribing: Source Path


Information data attribute in the transmitting device.

GOOSE Subscribing: GOOSE Identifier


ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.

GOOSE Subscribing: Dataset Reference


Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.

GOOSE Subscribing: Configuration Revision


Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.

GOOSE Subscribing: Data Obj Index


Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.

GOOSE Subscribing: Data Type


Structure of the data object; possible settings:

Unknown Boolean Int8 Int16 Int32 UInt8 UInt16 UInt32 Float BStr2 SPS DPS

Unknown Boolean Integer, 8 bits (binary digits) Integer, 16 bits (binary digits) Integer, 32 bits (binary digits) Positive integer, 8 bits (binary digits) Positive integer, 16 bits (binary digits) Positive integer, 32 bits (binary digits) Floating-point number Binary state, 2 bits Single-pole signal Two-pole signal

GOOSE Subscribing: Quality Obj Index


Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.

32

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630


(continued)

GOOSE Subscribing: Invalidity Quality bits


Quality criterion, which is to be tested.

Invalid / Questionable Source Relay test OperatorBlocked Overflow OutofRange BadReference Oscillatory Failure OldData Inconsistent Inaccurate

Invalid / questionable Information source is faulty Sending unit is set to test mode Blocked by operator Measured value has exceeded its capacity Measured value has exceeded its range Referenced value is faulty Value is volatile Faulty Information is out-of-date Information is unreliable Information is inaccurate

and

GOOSE Subscribing: Evaluation Expression


Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set integer value; the parameter is not supported in the unit. Equal to Compared to: equal Not equal to Compared to: unequal Greater than Compared to: greater Less than Compared to: less Pass through Do not compare

GOOSE Subscribing: Default Input Value


Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed False Default: not set True Default: set Last Known Value Default: retain last value received Double Point: intermediate (00) Default: switching device in intermediate position Double Point: Off (01) Default: switching device open Double Point: On (10) Default: switching device closed Double Point: Bad state (11) Default: switching device in intermediate position

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

33

34

P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

Customer Care Centre


http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric
06/2011 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630

www.schneider-electric.com Publication:

2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Customer Care Centre


http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric 06/2011

www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P63x/EN M/Aq6 Version: -610 -611 -620 -621 -622 -630, Volume 2

2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Anda mungkin juga menyukai